Jeep 2013 Wrangler Owners Manual Owner's

2015-10-23

: Jeep Jeep-2013-Jeep-Wrangler-Owners-Manual-817422 jeep-2013-jeep-wrangler-owners-manual-817422 jeep pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 666 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Wrangler
Includes Wrangler Unlimited
Chrysler Group LLC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2013 Wrangler
13JK72-126-AF Sixth Edition Printed in U.S.A.
2013
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drink-
ing, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver,
call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of fea-
tures and equipment that are either standard or optional on
this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
and equipment described in this manual that are not on this
vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obliga-
tion upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1INTRODUCTION .............................................................3
2THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ............................11
3UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ............................105
4UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ..................................299
5STARTING AND OPERATING .................................................409
6WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ..............................................545
7MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ...............................................567
8MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES .................................................621
9IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ........................................631
10 INDEX ....................................................................643
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵INTRODUCTION ........................4
䡵ROLLOVER WARNING ....................5
䡵HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ..............6
䡵WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ..............8
䡵VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ........8
䡵VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ....9
1
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not
intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from
many passenger cars both on-road and off-road, so take
time to become familiar with your vehicle.
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed
for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road
driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a
four-wheel drive vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s
Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmis-
sion, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills
will improve with experience. When driving off-road or
working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect
the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws
wherever you drive.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a
collision. Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
4 INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity and the narrower track, if
this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some
other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
1
INTRODUCTION 5
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro-
vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In a
rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always
buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
Rollover Warning Label
6 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 7
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read
this entire Owners Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel pad, visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears underbody, on the right side of the
frame rail near the center of the vehicle, as well as on the
Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a
window on your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient
record of your vehicle identification number and optional
equipment.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.
Vehicle Identification Number
8 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
INTRODUCTION 9
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............15
▫Ignition Key Removal ...................15
▫Key-In-Ignition Reminder ................16
䡵STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED ....17
▫To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel .......17
▫To Release The Steering Wheel Lock .........17
▫Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock
System ..............................17
䡵SENTRY KEY® .........................18
▫Replacement Keys .....................19
▫Customer Key Programming ..............20
▫General Information ....................21
䡵VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF
EQUIPPED ............................21
▫Rearming The System ...................21
▫To Arm The System ....................22
▫To Disarm The System ..................22
2
䡵ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED ......23
䡵REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
EQUIPPED ............................24
▫To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate .......24
▫Remote Key Unlock On First Press ..........24
▫To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate .........25
▫Sound Horn On Lock ...................26
▫Using The Panic Alarm ..................26
▫To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock .........27
▫Programming Additional Transmitters........27
▫General Information ....................28
▫Transmitter Battery Replacement ...........28
䡵REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED ............................29
▫How To Use Remote Start ................30
䡵DOORS ..............................32
▫Upper Half Door Window Removal — If
Equipped ............................33
▫Upper Half Door Window Installation — If
Equipped ............................33
▫Front Door Removal ....................33
▫Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models) ......35
䡵DOOR LOCKS .........................38
▫Manual Door Locks ....................38
▫Power Door Locks — If Equipped ..........40
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors...............................42
䡵WINDOWS ...........................43
▫Power Windows — If Equipped ...........43
▫Wind Buffeting .......................45
䡵REAR SWING GATE .....................45
䡵OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS ................47
▫Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................50
▫Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor
Lockout — Four-Door Models Only .........55
▫Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure .....56
▫Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .56
▫Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions ......57
▫Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped ............................58
▫Energy Management Feature ..............59
▫Seat Belt Pretensioners ..................60
▫Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) ..........................60
▫Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ...........61
▫Seat Belt Extender .....................61
▫Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Air Bags ............................62
▫Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls ....67
▫Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...............74
▫Child Restraints .......................75
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
䡵ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ....99
䡵SAFETY TIPS .........................100
▫Transporting Passengers .................100
▫Exhaust Gas .........................100
▫Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .............................101
▫Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ...................103
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in a plastic
bag with the key code number on it. If you received your
keys without the bag, ask your authorized dealer to give
you the number. The key code can also be obtained by
your authorized dealer from your vehicle invoice.
Ignition Key Removal
1. Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with an
automatic transmission).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (ACCESSORY)
position.
3. Push the ignition key inward.
4.
Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, and remove
the key.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — LOCK 3 — ON/RUN
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY) 4 — START
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
WARNING!
•Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and re-
move the Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE:
The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when
the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering
wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle with-
out the ignition key. If the steering wheel is moved
approximately a half turn in either direction, and the key
is not in the ignition, the steering wheel will lock.
To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel
With the engine running, rotate the steering wheel one–
half revolution from the straight ahead position, turn off
the engine, and remove the key. Rotate the steering wheel
slightly in both directions until the lock engages.
To Release The Steering Wheel Lock
Insert the key in the ignition, and turn the wheel slightly
to the left or right, to disengage the lock.
NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the
lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to
disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage
the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.
Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
PARK unless the key is in the ON/RUN position, and the
brake pedal is depressed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unau-
thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the
engine.
NOTE: A key that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the Vehicle Security Light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine.
Either of these conditions will result in the engine being
shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-
ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a Sentry Key® is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Keys® from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Du-
plication of keys may be performed at an authorized
dealer or by following the customer key programming
procedure. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Sys-
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid Sentry Keys®, you can program
new Sentry Keys® to the system by performing the
following procedure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key® Transponder blank(s)
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position for at
least three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position
and remove the first key.
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
within 15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will
sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will
begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position and remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key® into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
within 60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime
will sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will
stop flashing. To indicate that programming is com-
plete, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for
three seconds and then turn off.
The new Sentry Key® is programmed. The Remote Key-
less Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be programmed
during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed Sentry Key®, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
NOTE:
If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the system’s
memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your
vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed.
All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at
the time of service to be reprogrammed.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•This device may not cause harmful interference.
•This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
swing gate, and ignition for unauthorized operation. While
the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for
door locks are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm pro-
vides both audible and visible signals when alarming. The
horn will sound, the headlights will turn on, the park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three
minutes. If the disturbance is still present (driver’s door,
passenger door, other doors, ignition) after three minutes,
the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash
for an additional 15 minutes.
NOTE: The Panic Alarm and the Vehicle Security Alarm
are quite different. Please take a moment to activate the
Panic Alarm and the Vehicle Security Alarm to hear the
differences in the horn. In case one should go off in the
future, you will need to know which mode has been
activated in order to deactivate it.
Rearming The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
To Arm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock the doors
and swing gate, or when you use the power door lock
switch while the door is open. After all the doors are
locked and closed, the Vehicle Security Light (located on
the instrument cluster) will flash rapidly for about 16 sec-
onds to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming.
During this 16-second arming period, opening any door
or the swing gate will cancel the arming. If the Vehicle
Security Alarm is successfully set, the Vehicle Security
Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the Vehicle
Security Alarm is armed.
To Disarm The System
To disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm, you will need to
press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter, or
turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you
remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE
transmitter, once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed
(after 16 seconds), when you pull the door handle to exit,
the alarm will sound. If this occurs, press the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm. You may also accidentally disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm by unlocking the driver’s door
with the key and then locking it. The door will be locked
but the Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•Unlocking the doors with the manual door lock plung-
ers or the driver’s door lock cylinder will not disarm
the Vehicle Security Alarm.
•When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
NOTE:
•The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
⬙Dome ON⬙position (extreme top position).
•The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
swing gate, and activate the Panic Alarm from a maxi-
mum distance of 66 ft (20 m) using a Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate
Press and release the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button
once to unlock the driver’s door only, or twice to unlock
all the doors and swing gate. When the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button is pressed, the Illuminated Entry will
initiate and the parking lights will flash twice.
Remote Key Unlock On First Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s side, or all doors and swing gate on the first
press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
•
For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Three Button RKE Transmitter
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Remote
Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled by perform-
ing the following steps:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter.
2. Continue to hold the RKE transmitter LOCK button
for at least four seconds, but not longer than 10 sec-
onds, then press and hold the RKE transmitter UN-
LOCK button.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test this feature while outside of the vehicle by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter.
NOTE: Pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK button
while you are inside of the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate
the Vehicle Security Alarm.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors. The turn signals will flash and the
horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Sound Horn On Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
•For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the RKE transmitter LOCK button for 4 to
10 seconds.
2. While the LOCK button is pressed (after four seconds),
press the RKE transmitter PANIC button. Release both
buttons.
The “Sound Horn On Lock” feature can be reactivated by
repeating this procedure.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated, the
headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the horn
will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second
time, or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
NOTE: When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to move
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
the system.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
•For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
•For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button for 4 to
10 seconds.
2. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (after four
seconds) press the RKE transmitter LOCK button.
Release both buttons.
3. Test the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature outside of
the vehicle by pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK
button with the ignition in the LOCK position and the
key removed.
NOTE: Pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK button
while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate the Ve-
hicle Security Alarm.
The “Flash Lights With Lock” feature can be reactivated
by repeating this procedure.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Key® “Customer Key Programming.”
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life
of a battery is five years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some
mobile or CB radios.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may ap-
ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a
flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE
transmitter apart. Use extreme care not to damage the
seal or internal components.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
•The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
•Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter
may reduce this range.
Separating RKE Transmitter Halves
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•Shift lever in PARK
•Doors closed
•Hood closed
•Hazard switch off
•Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•Ignition key removed from ignition switch
•Battery at an acceptable charge level
•RKE PANIC button not pressed
•System not disabled from previous remote start event
•Vehicle theft alarm not active
WARNING!
•Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-
jury or death when inhaled.
•Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema-
turely:
•Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
•Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
•Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
•Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar
•Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start
Press and release the REMOTE START button on
the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds.
The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights
will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
•The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•For security, power window operation is disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
•The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:
•The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500
•Any engine warning lamps come on
•The hood is opened
•The hazard switch is pressed
•The transmission is moved out of PARK
•The brake pedal is pressed
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN
position in order to drive the vehicle.
DOORS
CAUTION!
Careless handling and storage of the removable door
panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Upper Half Door Window Removal — If Equipped
Grasp the half door window and pull upward.
Upper Half Door Window Installation — If Equipped
1. Grasp the half door window and line up the pins with
the pockets in the lower door.
2. Push down to ensure the half door window is fully
seated.
Front Door Removal
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use
during off-road operation only.
Upper Half Door Window
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.
2.
Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower
outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx® head driver).
NOTE: The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in
the rear cargo tray located under the rear loadfloor.
3.
Unplug the wiring harness connector under the instru-
ment panel by pressing the tab at the top of the connector
and pulling to disconnect.
NOTE:
If the red latch on the connector is locked, pull the
red latch down. This will unlock the connector tab, allowing
the tab to be pressed down and enabling the harness to be
disconnected.
Door Removal Warning Label Hinge Pin Screw
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Unhook the door strap from the body hook. Be careful
not to allow the door to swing fully open as the mirror
may damage the paint.
5. With the door open, lift the door to clear the hinge pins
from their hinges and remove the door.
NOTE: Doors are heavy; use caution when removing
them.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the
opposite order.
Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models)
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use
during off-road operation only.
Door Strap/Harness Location
1 — Wiring Harness (follow the harness up and under the instru-
ment panel to the connector)
2 — Body Hook
3 — Door/Harness Strap
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.
2.
Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower
outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx® head driver).
NOTE: The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in
the rear cargo tray located under the rear loadfloor.
3. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.
4. Remove the trim access door from the bottom of the
B-pillar.
Door Removal Warning Label Hinge Pin Screw
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Unplug the wiring harness connector.
NOTE: If the red latch on the connector is locked, push
the red latch to the right until you can only see the latch
on one end (right) of the connector. This will unlock the
connector tab, allowing the tab to be pressed down and
enabling the harness to be disconnected.
6. Unhook the door strap from the body hook.
7. With the door open, lift the door to clear the hinge pins
from their hinges and remove the door.
NOTE:
Doors are heavy; use caution when removing them.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the
opposite order.
Trim Access Door Red Connector Latch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
All doors are equipped with an interior rocker-type door
lock lever. To lock a door when leaving your vehicle, press
the rocker lever forward to the LOCK position and close
the door. To UNLOCK the door press the rocker lever
rearward.
Manual Door Lock (Full Frame Doors)
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The ignition key that is used to start the vehicle
is used to lock or unlock the doors, swing gate, glove
compartment, and console storage.
WARNING!
•For personal security reasons and safety in a colli-
sion, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
•Do not leave the key in or near the vehicle , or in a
location accessible to children. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Manual Door Lock (Half Doors)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
panel. Press the switch forward to lock the doors, and
rearward to unlock the doors.
WARNING!
•For personal security reasons and safety in a colli-
sion, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
•Do not leave the key in or near the vehicle , or in a
location accessible to children. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Power Door Lock Switch
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit” feature is
enabled.
2. The vehicle speed returned to 0 mph (0 km/h) and the
transmission shift lever is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
3. The driver door is opened.
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
The “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit” feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON/
RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in
the LOCK position.
3. Press the power door unlock switch to unlock the
doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Use the “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit”
feature in accordance with local laws.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with Child-
Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the rocker lever rearward (unlocked position), roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
WINDOWS
Power Windows — If Equipped
The power window switches are located on the instru-
ment panel below the radio. Press the switch downward
to open the window and upward to close the window.
The top left switch controls the left front window and the
top right switch controls the right front window.
NOTE: The switches will continue to function for up to
10 minutes after the ignition key has been turned to the
LOCK position, or until a front door is opened.
Power Window Switches
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Four-Door Models
The lower left switch controls the left rear passenger
window, and the lower right switch controls the right
rear passenger window.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switches
have an “Auto-Down” feature. Press the window switch
past the first detent, release, and the window will go
down automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down move-
ment, operate the switch in either the up or down
direction and release the switch.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
To partially open the window, press halfway to the first
detent and release it when you want the window to stop.
Window Lockout Switch — Four-Door Models
The window lockout switch (located between the front
window switches) allows you to disable the rear window
switches that are located on the back of the center floor
console. To disable the window controls, press the win-
dow lockout button downward. To enable the window
controls, press the window lockout button upward.
Window Lockout Switch
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Power Windows — Four-Door Models
The rear passenger window switches are located on the
back of the center floor console. Press the switch down-
ward to open the window and upward to close the
window.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down in certain open or partially open posi-
tions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized
by adjusting the window opening.
REAR SWING GATE
The rear swing gate can be unlocked by using the key,
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or by activating
the power door lock switches located on the front doors.
Rear Power Window Switches (Four-Door Models)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
To open the swing gate, press the button on the gate
handle.
NOTE: Close the rear flip-up window before attempting
to close the swing gate (hard top models only).
CAUTION!
Do not press on rear wiper blade when closing the
rear flip-up window, as damage to the blade will
result.
WARNING!
Driving with the flip-up window open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and
your passengers could be injured by these fumes.
Keep the flip-up window closed when you are oper-
ating the vehicle.
Gate Handle
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
•Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
all passengers
•Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front
passenger
•Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) — if
equipped
•An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
•Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
•Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
•All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
item in a seat — if equipped
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH).
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Ad-
vanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can cause
severe injury or death to infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt
properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be secured
in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster
seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
•
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) also
need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
•In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is de-
signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a
collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you
striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
•It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
•Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
•Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
•Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
(Continued)
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
•Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat and next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the
latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to
go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
•A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
•A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-
erly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron-
gest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in
a collision.
NOTE: The Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the driver and front passenger (if equipped with
front passenger BeltAlert®) seat belt is buckled. For
further information, refer to “Enhanced Seat Belt Use
Reminder System (BeltAlert®)”.
Removing Slack From Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING!
•A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdo-
men. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
•A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immedi-
ately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac-
tor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi-
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor
Lockout — Four-Door Models Only
This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever
the 60% rear seatback is not fully latched. This prevents
someone from wearing the rear center lap/shoulder belt
when the rear seatback is not fully latched.
NOTE:
•If the rear center lap/shoulder belt cannot be pulled
out, check that the rear seatback is fully latched.
•If the rear seatback is properly latched and the rear
center lap/shoulder belt still cannot be pulled out, the
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) system may be
activated. To reset this feature you must let all of the
belt webbing return into the retractor. You will not be
able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing
has been returned back into the retractor.
WARNING!
The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
lock-out feature to ensure that the rear seatback is in
the fully upright and locked position when occupied.
If the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked
and the rear center lap/shoulder belt can be pulled
out of the retractor, the vehicle should immediately
be taken to your authorized dealer for service. Failure
to follow this warning could result in serious or fatal
injury.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seat positions, the shoulder belt anchorage
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt
away from your neck. Push in on the anchorage near
your outside shoulder and slide it up or down to reach
the position that serves you best.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Position the shoulder belt height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure
to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the
effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Re-
straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
Driver Center Passenger
First Row N/A N/A ALR
Second
Row
ALR ALR ALR
•N/A — Not Applicable
•ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked.
The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the
shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on
all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/
shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a
belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under
should always be properly restrained in the rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
•The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
•Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Man-
agement feature in the front seating positions to help further
reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
WARNING!
•The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
•Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu-
pants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®)
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu-
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your autho-
rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert®.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and store it.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and right front passenger as a supplement to the
seat belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front
Air Bag is mounted in the steering wheel. The Advanced
Front Passenger Air Bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The letters SRS are
embossed on the air bag covers. NOTE: The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bags are certified to new Federal regulations.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB). The SABs are marked with
an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front
seats.
NOTE:
•Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
•After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
•Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•Air Bag Warning Light
•Steering Wheel and Column
•Instrument Panel
•Knee Impact Bolster
•Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
•Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
•Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
•Front and Side Impact Sensors
•Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
•
No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel, because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
(Continued)
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
•If your vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB), do not use
accessory seat covers or place objects between you
and the SAB; the performance could be adversely
affected and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•If your vehicle is equipped with SAB, do not attach
cupholders or any other objects on or around the
door. The inflating SAB could drive the objects
into occupants, causing serious injury.
•
Do not cover or place items on the air bag covers.
These items may cause serious injury during infla-
tion.
•Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SAB) — If Equipped
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
NOTE:
•Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
•Being too close to the SAB during deployment could
cause you to be severely injured or killed.
SAB air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Occupants, including children who are up
against or very close to SAB air bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should
not lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the SAB air bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint. Always sit upright as possible
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Location
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
with your back against the seat back, use the seat belts
properly, and use the appropriate sized child restraint,
infant restraint or booster seat recommended for the size
and weight of the child.
The system includes side impact sensors that are cali-
brated to deploy the SAB air bags during impacts that
require air bag occupant protection.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the
front passenger, and position the front occupant for the
best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side air
bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags is required in a frontal or side collision.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, Supplemen-
tal Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) — if equipped, and
front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on
the severity and type of impact.
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all crashes,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch
is in the START or ON/RUN positions. If the key is in the
LOCK position, in the ACC position, or not in the
ignition, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will
not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light for four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound
if the light comes on again after initial startup.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to
70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Inflator Units — If Equipped
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags Inflator
Units (if equipped) are designed to activate only in
certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
air bags to inflate, based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
Based on several factors, including the severity and type
of collision, the side air bag inflator on the crash side of
the vehicle is triggered releasing a quantity of non-toxic
gas. The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into
the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB
fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag
moves at a very high speed and with such a high force
that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or
if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag
inflates. This especially applies to children.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the ORC in
determining appropriate response to impact events.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if the
communication network remains intact, and the power
remains intact, depending on the nature of the event the
ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident
Response System perform the following functions:
•Cut off fuel to the engine.
•Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the
battery has power or until the ignition key is removed.
•Unlock the doors automatically.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
•Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
air bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
•Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners can-
not protect you in another collision. Have the air
bags, seat belt pretensioner, and seat belt retractor
assembly replaced by an authorized dealer imme-
diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Control-
ler (ORC) system serviced as well.
•Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
•Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
(Continued)
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper or vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•You need proper knee impact protection in a colli-
sion. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee bolsters.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
•The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
•The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
•The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
•How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
•How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
•How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK.
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-
childsafety-index-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child
Restraint
Infants and
Toddlers
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a
Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-
facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-
facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
•Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
•Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a rear
seat.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
•Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
•When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit peri-
odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
or behind their back.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
Latch Positions (Two-Door Models)
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Latch Positions (Four-Door Models)
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorages?
No
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install
a child seat in the center seating position.
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in-
stall a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchor-
ages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes, center position
only.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
Latch Anchorages (Two-Door Models)
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
In addition, there are tether strap anchors lo-
cated behind each rear seatback, near to the
floor.
Latch Anchorages (Four-Door Models)
Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating position.
Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to
install a child seat in the center of the back seat.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models)
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit.
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
ing position.
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seatbelt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un-
der “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight
when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a
child restraint’s belt path. Please see the table below and
the following sections for more information about both
types of seat belts.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Restraints in this Vehicle
Two-Door Models
Four-Door Models
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing child
restraint, up to the recommended weight
limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes, center position only.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the child
restraint?
Yes In positions with cinching latch plates
(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted
up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle
stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil-
dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get
a better fit.
2.
Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil-
dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, discon-
nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
restraint.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage — Second Row Captains Chairs
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position (see the
charts above), move the child restraint to another
position in the vehicle if one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
•An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
•If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An
unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured,
or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models)
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 500 miles (800 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided. Trailer tow is not recom-
mended during break in period.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as an indication of difficulty.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
•Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
•It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
•Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
•Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
•If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel
the air directed against the windshield. See your autho-
rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
•Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
•Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-
ing with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
•Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
•Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
•If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵MIRRORS ............................111
▫Inside Day/Night Mirror ................111
▫Outside Mirrors ......................112
▫Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .113
▫Power Mirrors — If Equipped ............114
▫Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ............114
▫Vanity Mirrors .......................115
䡵Uconnect® Phone — IF EQUIPPED ..........115
▫Operation ...........................118
▫Help Command.......................119
▫Cancel Command .....................119
▫Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone to a Mobile
Phone ..............................119
▫Dial by Saying a Number ................120
▫Call by Saying a Name..................120
▫Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone..............121
▫Add Names to Your Uconnect® Phonebook . . .122
▫Edit Uconnect® Phonebook Entries .........123
▫Delete Uconnect® Phonebook Entry ........124
3
▫Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect® Phonebook
Entries .............................124
▫List All Names in the Uconnect® Phonebook . .125
▫Phone Call Features ....................125
▫Uconnect® Phone Features ...............128
▫Advanced Phone Connectivity ............134
▫Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone .....................135
▫General Information ...................147
䡵VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED .......147
▫Voice Command System Operation .........147
▫Commands ..........................149
▫Voice Training ........................153
䡵SEATS ..............................153
▫Front Seat Adjustment ..................154
▫Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If
Equipped ...........................155
▫Front Seatback Recline .................156
▫Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat — Two-Door
Models ............................156
▫Tip n’ Slide Seats — Two-Door Models ......158
▫Heated Seats — If Equipped .............160
▫Head Restraints ......................162
▫Fold And Tumble Rear Seat — Two-Door
Models ............................163
▫Removing The Rear Seat — Two-Door
Models ............................164
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫Replacing The Rear Seat — Two-Door
Models ............................165
▫60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four-Door
Models ............................165
䡵TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........167
䡵LIGHTS .............................168
▫Multifunction Lever ....................168
▫Headlights And Parking Lights ............169
▫Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .......170
▫Turn Signals .........................171
▫Lane Change Assist ...................171
▫Lights-On Reminder ...................171
▫High/Low Beam Switch.................172
▫Flash-To-Pass ........................172
▫Front Fog Lights ......................172
▫Instrument Panel Dimmer ...............172
▫Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .....173
▫Interior Lights .......................173
䡵WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......176
▫Windshield Wiper Operation .............177
▫Intermittent Wiper System ...............177
▫Windshield Washers....................178
▫Mist Feature .........................179
䡵TILT STEERING COLUMN ...............179
䡵ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................180
▫To Activate ..........................181
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
▫To Set A Desired Speed .................182
▫To Deactivate ........................182
▫To Resume Speed .....................182
▫To Vary The Speed Setting ...............182
▫To Accelerate For Passing ................183
䡵ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET ............184
䡵POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED ........188
䡵CUPHOLDERS ........................190
▫Front Cupholders .....................190
▫Rear Cupholders ......................190
䡵STORAGE ............................191
▫Glovebox Storage......................191
▫Console Storage Compartment ............191
▫Rear Storage Compartment ..............192
䡵DUAL TOP — TWO-DOOR MODELS — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................193
▫Removing The Soft Top — Two-Door Models . .193
▫Installing The Soft Top — Two-Door Models . .195
䡵DUAL TOP — FOUR-DOOR MODELS — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................198
▫Removing The Soft Top — Four-Door
Models .............................198
▫Installing The Soft Top — Four-Door Models . .202
䡵FREEDOM TOP™ THREE-PIECE MODULAR
HARD TOP — IF EQUIPPED ..............206
▫Front Panel(s) Removal .................207
▫Freedom Top™ Storage Bag ..............209
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫Front Panel(s) Installation................213
▫Front Panel(s) Installation With Rear Hard Top
Removed ...........................213
▫Rear Hard Top Removal ................214
▫Rear Hard Top Installation ...............217
䡵DOOR FRAME.........................217
▫Door Frame Removal ...................218
▫
Door Frame Installation — Two-Door Models . . .220
▫Door Frame Installation — Four-Door
Models .............................222
䡵SOFT TOP — TWO-DOOR MODELS ........225
▫Quick Steps To Lowering The Soft Top ......227
▫Quick Steps To Raising The Soft Top ........231
▫Lowering The Soft Top..................235
▫Raising The Soft Top ...................244
䡵SOFT TOP — FOUR-DOOR MODELS ........253
▫Quick Steps For Lowering The Soft Top ......256
▫Quick Steps For Raising The Soft Top .......260
▫Folding Down The Soft Top ..............265
▫Putting Up The Soft Top.................275
䡵SUNRIDER® (TWO-DOOR MODELS) — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................284
▫Opening The Sunrider® .................285
▫Closing The Sunrider®..................287
䡵SUNRIDER® (FOUR-DOOR MODELS) — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................287
▫Opening The Sunrider® .................288
▫Closing The Sunrider®..................290
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
䡵FOLDING WINDSHIELD .................290
▫Lowering The Windshield And Removing
Side Bars ...........................292
▫Raising The Windshield And Replacing
Side Bars ...........................295
䡵REAR WINDOW FEATURES — HARD
TOPONLY ...........................297
▫Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped . .297
▫Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped ......298
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side mirror.
Outside Rearview Mirror
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror switch is located on the center of the
instrument panel, below the climate controls. A rotary
knob selects the left mirror, right mirror or off position.
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same
direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off
position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
position.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster if equipped. Some vehicles may
not be equipped with rear window defroster, in this case
the heated mirrors will still function as intended. Refer to
“Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Fea-
tures Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Power Mirror Switch
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Vanity Mirrors
Vanity mirrors are located on the sun visors. To use the
mirrors, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror
cover upward.
Uconnect® Phone — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone al-
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ“Work” or “Dial” ѧ“248-555-1212”). Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehi-
cle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile”,
Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect® website for
supported phones.
Vanity Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
For Uconnect® customer support:
•U.S. residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call
1–877–855–8400.
•
Canadian Residents - visit www.DriveUconnect.ca or call,
1-800-465–2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your Bluetooth®
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect® features
Bluetooth® technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other without
wires or a docking station, so Uconnect® Phone works no
matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse,
pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and
has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The
Uconnect® Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be
linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
phone can be used with the system at a time. The system is
available in English, Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at-
tention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect® Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if equipped)
will contain the two control buttons (Uconnect®
Phone
button and Voice Command
button) that will enable you to access the
system. When you press the button you will hear the
word Uconnect® followed by a BEEP. The beep is your
signal to give a command.
NOTE: The driver side upper windshield trim contains
the microphone for the Uconnect® Phone.
Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary with the ra-
dio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The Uconnect® Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth® mobile phone. See the
Uconnect® website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
details.
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect® Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
certain radios.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect® Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another
prompt.
•For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
“Phone Pairing”, the following compound command
can be said: “Setup Phone Pairing”.
•For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice com-
mand “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break the
compound form command into two voice commands:
“Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, the
Uconnect® Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep. The Uconnect® Phone will play all the options
at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the Uconnect® Phone from idle, simply press
the button and follow the audible prompts for direc-
tions. All Uconnect® Phone sessions begin with a press of
the button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone to a Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect® web-
site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
The following are general phone to Uconnect® Phone
pairing instructions:
•Press the button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
•When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Phone”
and follow the audible prompts.
•You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
•For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the Uconnect® Phone a name for your mobile
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
phones to your Uconnect® Phone. However, at any
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
connected to your Uconnect® System. The priority
allows the Uconnect® Phone to know which mobile
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect® Phone will use the priority three mobile
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
Dial by Saying a Number
•Press the button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial”.
•The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
•For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.
•The Uconnect® Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
•Press the button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Call”.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect® phonebook
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect® Phonebook”, in the phonebook.
•The Uconnect® system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
appear in the display of certain radios.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect®
website for supported phones.
•To call a name from downloaded (or Uconnect®)
Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a
Name” section.
•Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect® Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
•A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect® Phone.
•
Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available,
the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
•Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
•Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile
phonebook.
•This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
phone connection.
Add Names to Your Uconnect® Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect® Phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
•Press the button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook New Entry”.
•When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom-
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
instead of “Bob”.
•When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone-
book entry, if desired.
•When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Uconnect® Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone automati-
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
Edit Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
•Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
•Press the button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Edit”.
•You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
•When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
“Phonebook Edit” can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit”
feature.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Delete Uconnect® Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•Press the button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Delete”.
•After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the button while the
Uconnect® Phone is playing the desired entry and say
“Delete”.
•After you enter the name, the Uconnect® Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
•Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
•Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
•Press the button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All”.
•The Uconnect® Phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
•Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
•Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
List All Names in the Uconnect® Phonebook
•Press the button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook List Names”.
•The Uconnect® Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
book entries, if available.
•To call one of the names in the list, press the button
during the playing of the desired name, and say
“Call”.
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
operations at this point.
•The Uconnect® Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
•The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press the button to accept the call. To reject the
call, press and hold the button until you hear a single
beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Press the button to place the current
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call While Current Call is in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to “Conference Call” in this section.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the but-
ton until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the button until you hear a single beep, indicat-
ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have
switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the button while
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under “Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,
press and hold the button until you hear a double
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the but-
ton. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the
active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the button until you hear a single beep.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Redial
•Press the button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Redial”.
•The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect® Phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can continue
on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call ends, or
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the Uconnect® Phone and transfer of the call
to the mobile phone.
•After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call can continue
on the Uconnect® Phone for a certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
Uconnect® Phone to the mobile phone.
•An active call is automatically transferred to the mo-
bile phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF.
Uconnect® Phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect® Phone is using:
•Press the button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the
language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every Uconnect® Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-
specific and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
•Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as fol-
lows:
•Press the button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will instruct
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
•
The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available mobile service and area.
•If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the button and say
“Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
•The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the mobile phone directly.
WARNING!
To use you Uconnect® Phone System in an emer-
gency, your mobile phone must be:
•turned on,
•paired to the Uconnect® System,
•and have network coverage.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
•Press the button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Towing Assistance”.
NOTE:
•
The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-2069
for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454 for
Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City
in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour Towing Assistance
coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information
Booklet and the 24-Hour Towing Assistance references.
•If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the button and say
“Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect® Phone.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems”.
Working with Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
or automated customer service line. Some services re-
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter,
followed by the word “Send”. For example, if required to
enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3746#),you
can press the button and say, “3746#Send”.
Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by
“Send”, is also to be used for navigating through an
automated customer service center menu structure, and
to leave a number on a pager.
You can also send stored Uconnect® Phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the button and say, “Send”. The
system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
The Uconnect® Phone will then send the corresponding
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
tones over the phone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
NOTE:
•You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
•Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
could press the button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect® Phone
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
•Press the button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say:
– “Setup Confirmations Prompts On”
– “Setup Confirmations Prompts Off”
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your mobile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect® Phone. The status is given for roaming,
network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dialing Using the Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth® mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicles
audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa-
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect® Phone:
•Press the button.
•Following the beep, say “Mute”.
In order to un-mute the Uconnect® Phone:
•Press the button.
•Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Mobile Phone
The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your Uconnect® Phone paired mobile phone to the
Uconnect® Phone or vice versa, press the button
and say “Transfer Call”.
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
Uconnect® Phone and Mobile Phone
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
connection between a Uconnect® Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect® Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
•Press the button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
•When prompted, say “List Phones”.
•The Uconnect® Phone will play the phone names of all
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone
being announced, press the button and say “Se-
lect” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sections for an
alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Select Another Mobile Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the Uconnect® Phone.
•Press the button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
•You can also press the button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
•The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect® Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Delete Uconnect® Phone Paired Mobile Phones
•Press the button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
•At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
prompts.
•You can also press the button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone you
wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone
Uconnect® Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect® Tutorial”.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect®
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
dures:
From outside the Uconnect® Phone mode (e.g., from
radio mode):
•Press and hold the button for five seconds until
the session begins, or,
•Press the button and say the “Voice Training”,
“System Training”, or “Start Voice Training” com-
mand.
You can either press the Uconnect® Phone button to
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect® Phone. For
best results, the Voice Training session should be com-
pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Reset
•Press the button.
•After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
and other settings in all language modes. The System will
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Command
•For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
•Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally without pausing, just as you would speak
to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
•Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
•Performance is maximized under:
•low-to-medium blower setting,
•low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•low road noise,
•smooth road surface,
•fully closed windows,
•dry weather condition.
•Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
•When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
•Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
•It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
in the Uconnect® Phonebook.
•Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Lo-
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
•Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
•You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
•Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
•In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
•Audio quality is maximized under:
•low-to-medium blower setting,
•low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•low road noise,
•smooth road surface,
•fully closed windows,
•dry weather conditions, and
•operation from the driver’s seat.
•Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect® Phone.
•Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
•In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Recent Calls
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down-
load”, Uconnect® Phone can list your Outgoing, Incom-
ing and Missed Calls.
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
If you wish to hear the new message:
•Press the button.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages”.
•Uconnect® Phone will play the new text message for
you.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
the message using Uconnect® Phone.
Send Messages:
You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
a new message:
•Press the button.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Send” or “Send Messages”.
•You can either say the message you wish to send or say
“List Messages”. There are 20 preset messages.
To send a message, press the button while the
system is listing the message and say “Send”.
Uconnect® Phone will prompt you to say the name or
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
List of Preset Messages:
1. Yes
2. No
3. Where are you?
4. I need more direction.
5. L O L
6. Why
7. I love you
8. Call me
9. Call me later
10. Thanks
11. See You in 15 minutes
12. I am on my way
13. I’ll be late
14. Are you there yet?
15. Where are we meeting?
16. Can this wait?
17. Bye for now
18. When can we meet
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
the system from announcing the new incoming mes-
sages.
•Press the button.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, Incoming Message Announcement,” you will
then be given a choice to change it.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth® ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the
system.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate (s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
call
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate (s)
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
language
list names
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate (s)
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate (s)
return to main menu return or main menu
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect® Tutorial
voice training
work
yes
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
•This device may not cause harmful interference.
•This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command System Operation
The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player,
USB mass storage class device, iPod® family of
devices, Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device,
satellite radio, disc player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System
as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the
Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands
may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised
voice level.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws. Your attention should be focused on safely
operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.
When you press the Voice Command button, you
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the Voice Command button, listen for
the beep, and say your command.
Pressing the Voice Command button while the
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Com-
mand button and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
Commands
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands. Universal commands are available at all
times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com-
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the
main menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
•“Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
•“Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
•“Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
•“USB” (to switch to USB mode)
•“Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth®
Streaming mode)
•“Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
•“System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Radio AM
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•“Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
•“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•“Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
•“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•“Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
•“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
•“Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
•“Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
•“Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
•“List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
•“Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
•“Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
•“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Disc Mode
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•“Track” (#) (to change the track)
•“Next Track” (to play the next track)
•“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
•“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
USB Mode
To switch to USB mode, say “USB”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•“Next Track” (to play the next track)
•“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
•“Play” (to play a Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
Name, Track Name, etc.)
Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) Mode
To switch to Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) mode, say
“Bluetooth Streaming”. In this mode, you may say the
following commands:
•“Next Track” (to play the next track)
•“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
•“List” (to list an Artist, Playlist, Album, Track, etc.)
Memo Mode
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•“New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying
one of the following commands:
– “Save” (to save the memo)
– “Continue” (to continue recording)
– “Delete” (to delete the recording)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
•“Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) —
During the playback you may press the Voice Com-
mand button to stop playing memos. You pro-
ceed by saying one of the following commands:
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
– “Next” (to play the next memo)
– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
– “Delete” (to delete a memo)
•“Delete All” (to delete all memos)
Setup
To switch to system setup, you may say one of the
following:
•“Change to setup”
•“Switch to system setup”
•“Change to setup”
•“Main menu setup” or
•“Switch to setup”
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
•“Language English”
•“Language French”
•“Language Spanish”
•“Tutorial”
•“Voice Training”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
Command button first and wait for the beep
before speaking the “Barge In” commands.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect®
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
1. Press the Voice Command button, say “System
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect® Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is
parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off. This procedure may be re-
peated with a new user. The system will adapt to the
last trained voice only.
SEATS
Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Front Seat Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a
bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
Manual Seat Adjustment
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
the ratcheting handle, located on the outboard side of the
seat. Pull upward on the handle to raise the seat; push
downward on the handle to lower the seat.
Seat Height Adjustment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Front Seatback Recline
Lean forward before lifting the handle, then lean back to
the desired position and release the handle. Lift the
handle to return the seatback to an upright position.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat — Two-Door
Models
Pull upward on the recline lever (toward the rear of the
vehicle) and slide the entire seat forward.
Recline Lever
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To return the seat to a sitting position, rotate the seatback
upright until it locks and push the seat rearward until the
track locks.
Easy Entry Lever Easy Entry Seat
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
NOTE:
•The front passenger seats have a track memory, which
returns the seat to just past the halfway point of the
track regardless of its original position.
•The recliner and easy entry levers should not be used
during the automatic returning of the seat to its sitting
position.
Tip n’ Slide Seats — Two-Door Models
This feature allows the front seats to be rotated toward
the instrument panel to allow easier entry into the rear
seats.
Driver’s Seat
Pull upward on the recline lever and bring the seatback
to its full forward position.
Rotate the entire seat assembly toward the instrument
panel.
Recline Lever
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Passenger Seat
In addition to Easy Entry, the front passenger seat is also
equipped with Tip n’ Slide. This feature allows for easier
entry for rear passengers.
Pull upward on the recline lever and slide the entire seat
forward (Easy Entry).
Tip n’ Slide
Easy Entry Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
With the seat forward, pull the entire seat assembly
toward the instrument panel.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks.
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each seat are located on a switch bank near
the bottom center of the instrument panel.
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
Tip n’ Slide
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LOW-level after ap-
proximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to
one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will turn
OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE: When a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
•Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
•Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the adjust-
ment button, located on the base of the head restraint,
and push downward on the head restraint.
Adjustment Button
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Head Restraints
The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable head re-
straints. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things to
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for information on
child seat tether routing.
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat — Two-Door Models
NOTE:
•Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
reposition the front seats.
•Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold
down easily.
1. Lift the seatback release lever and fold the seatback
forward.
Rear Seat Release
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
2. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.
3. Return the seat to the normal position.
4. Raise the rear seatback using the assist strap and
firmly lock the seat into position.
Removing The Rear Seat — Two-Door Models
WARNING!
•It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
•Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
•In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could
be injured if seats are not properly latched to their
floor attachments. Always be sure that the seats are
fully latched.
1. Fold the rear seat forward following steps 1 and 2
under “Fold And Tumble Rear Seat” in this section.
Folding Rear Seat
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Press down on the release bar on each side, and pull
the seat out and away from the lower bracket.
3. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
Replacing The Rear Seat — Two-Door Models
Reverse the steps for removing the seat.
WARNING!
•To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area with the
rear seat folded down or removed from the vehicle.
•The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers who should sit in
seats and use seat belts.
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four-Door Models
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat to allow for extended cargo space and still
maintain some rear seating room.
Release Bar Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
NOTE:
•Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
reposition the front seat to its mid-track position.
•Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold
down easily.
WARNING!
•It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
To Fold Down The Rear Seat
Locate the release lever (upper outboard side of seat), and
lift it upward until the seatback releases.
Slowly fold down the seatback.
Release Levers
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Raise The Rear Seat
Raise the seatback and lock it into place. If interference
from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.
NOTE: If the rear seatback is not fully latched, the center
shoulder belt will not be able to be extended for use. If
you cannot extend the center shoulder belt, make sure
your seatback is fully latched.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Release both the hood latches.
Raise the hood and locate the safety latch, located in the
middle of the hood opening. Push the safety latch to the
left side of the vehicle, to open the hood. You may have
Hood Latch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
to push down slightly on the hood before pushing the
safety latch. Insert the support rod into the slot on the
hood.
To close the hood, remove the support rod from the hood
panel and place it in the retaining clip. Lower the hood
slowly. Secure both of the hood latches.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
parking lights, headlights, headlight beam selection,
passing light, fog lights, instrument panel light dimming
and turn signals. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights And Parking Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
for parking light operation. Turn to the second detent for
headlight operation.
Multifunction Lever
Headlight Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO
position (third detent). When the system is on, the
Headlight Time Delay feature is also on. This means the
headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK position. To turn the
Automatic System off, turn the end of the multifunction
lever out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will turn on in the Automatic mode.
Headlight Switch
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
•If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
•A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for more
than 1 mile (2 km).
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the
ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the
driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Turn Signal Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you, to
switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
Front Fog Lights
The front fog light switch is located on the multi-
function lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking or low beam headlights and pull out the
end of the lever.
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the parking
lights or the headlights on low beam. Selecting high
beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme
bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights
and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a
door is opened.
Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park-
ing lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next
detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when
the parking lights or headlights are on.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last
detent to turn on the interior lighting.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The headlights come on at a low intensity level when
shifted into any position other than PARK (auto trans-
mission) or when the vehicle begins to move (manual
transmission).
NOTE: The Daytime Running Light on the same side of
the vehicle as the active turn signal will turn off auto-
matically when a turn signal is in operation and turn on
again when the turn signal is not operating.
Interior Lights
The overhead light will turn on when a door is opened. It
may also be turned on by rotating the control for the
dimmer switch on the multifunction lever fully upward.
The overhead light will automatically turn off in approxi-
mately 10 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer
control is left in the dome light position. Turn the ignition
switch ON to restore the overhead light operation.
Dimmer Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Two courtesy/reading lights are located in the bottom of the
rearview mirror. You can turn these lights on and off from
the switches in the mirror or from the dimmer control in the
multifunction lever. These lights are also controlled auto-
matically by the Illuminated Entry System.
A courtesy light is also found in the rear of the center
console. You can turn this light on and off from the
dimmer control in the multifunction lever. This light is
also controlled automatically by the Illuminated Entry
System.
Cargo Lamp
The courtesy and dome lights will turn on when the front
doors are opened, by rotating the control for the dimmer
switch on the multifunction lever fully upward, or if
equipped, when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
The sports bar reading lights (available on four-door
models) can be turned on by pressing the switches,
located on either side of the lens. Press a switch a second
time to turn the light off.
Courtesy/Reading Light Switches
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The rear cargo light may be turned on by pressing the
lens. Press the lens a second time to turn the light off.
Sports Bar Reading Light
Rear Cargo Light
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
When a door is open and the interior lights are on,
rotating the dimmer control to the extreme bottom posi-
tion will cause all the interior lights to turn off. This is
also known as the “Party” mode because it allows the
doors to stay open for extended periods of time without
discharging the vehicle’s battery.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on the
right side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located at the end of the lever.
For information on using the rear window wiper/washer,
refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper opera-
tion. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third
detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
operation.
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause be-
tween cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the lever to the
first detent position for one of five intermittent settings.
The delay cycle can be set anywhere between 1 to
18 seconds.
Front Wiper Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold while
spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the delay
range, the wiper will start and continue to operate for two or
three wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers will
operate for two or three wipe cycles and then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during wind-
shield washer use.
Front Wiper Control
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mist Feature
Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to
clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As
long as the lever is held down, the wipers will continue
to operate.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on the
steering column, below the turn signal lever.
Mist Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column.
With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the
steering column up or down, as desired. Pull upwards on
the lever to lock the column firmly in place.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Tilt Steering Column Lever
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES +
4 — CANCEL 3 — SET -
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result ina1mph
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result ina1mph
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) auxiliary power outlets
that can provide power for accessories designed for use
with the standard power outlet adapters.
The front power outlet is powered from the ignition
switch. Power is available when the ignition switch is in
the ON or ACC position.
When the optional cigar lighter heating element is used
in the power outlet, it heats when pushed in and pops out
automatically when ready for use. To preserve the heat-
ing element, do not hold the lighter in the heating
position.
Front Power Outlet
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A second power outlet is located inside the center console
and is powered directly from the vehicle battery.
CAUTION!
•Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
•Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer, there is a
third power outlet located in the right rear cargo area.
Rear Power Outlet — If Equipped
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
•Do not touch with wet hands.
•Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
•If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
3 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Rear with Sub Woofer
(Opt.)
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
mobile phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
•Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•After the use of high-power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
•Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
front of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electron-
ics and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Play-
station3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
Power Inverter
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
The power inverter switch is located
on the instrument panel below the
climate controls. To turn on the power
outlet, press the switch once. The indi-
cator light will illuminate. Press the
switch a second time to turn the power
inverter outlet off.
NOTE: When the power inverter switch is pressed, there
will be a delay of approximately one second before the
inverter indicator light turns ON.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
•Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
•Do not touch with wet hands.
•Close the lid when not in use.
•If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
CUPHOLDERS
Front Cupholders
The front cupholders are located in the center console.
Rear Cupholders
The rear cupholders are located on the back of the center
console.
Front Cupholders Rear Cupholders
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Glovebox Storage
The lockable glovebox storage compartment is located on
the passenger side of the lower instrument panel. Pull
outward on the handle/latch to open the compartment.
Console Storage Compartment
To lock or unlock the storage compartment, insert the
ignition key and turn. To open the storage compartment,
press the latch and lift the cover.
Center Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
There is an extra storage area underneath the console lid.
The console lid has an integrated paper clip feature that
can hold small items.
Rear Storage Compartment
The rear cargo area storage compartment cover is held by
a spring-loaded latch. In order to remove the rear storage
compartment cover, use the following procedure:
NOTE: The rear storage compartment latch should not
be used as cargo tie-down.
1. Flip up the pull loop so it is perpendicular (straight
up) to the top surface of the tray.
2. Pull up on the loop and twist it 90 degrees, so it is
parallel to the slotted hole in the tray.
3. Open the rear compartment cover.
Center Console Lid Storage
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
DUAL TOP — TWO-DOOR MODELS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, you must
remove one of the tops from the vehicle. If the soft top
is removed, the pivot brackets must also be removed
from the sport bar. The soft top was installed at the
factory for shipping purposes only. The soft top and the
hard top are to be used independently. Removal is
mandatory to prevent any possible wear and tear on the
soft top. Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage
resulting from both tops remaining on the vehicle at the
same time for extended periods of time.
Removing The Soft Top — Two-Door Models
1. Locate and remove the two boxes that contain the
following items:
•Right and left door frames
•Four door frame attachment knobs
•Right and left quarter windows
•Rear window
•Two rear window roll up straps
•Two Sunrider® secure straps (if equipped)
•Two rear swing gate brackets
Rear Storage Cover
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top Three-
Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Re-
moval” in this section.
3. Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracket
screws (two per side) using a #T30 Torx® head driver.
4. Disconnect the knuckles from the left and right metal
pivot brackets. Remove the soft top from the vehicle
and store in a clean, dry location.
NOTE: To aid in disconnecting the knuckles, you may
carefully tap on the knuckles using a rubber mallet.
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Unzip the zipper on the sport bar cover to expose the
pivot brackets. Remove the brackets using a #T30
Torx® head driver. Recover and re-zip the sports bar
cover. Store the pivot brackets and screws in a safe
place.
6. Reinstall the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top Three-
Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Instal-
lation” in this section.
Installing The Soft Top — Two-Door Models
NOTE: The following procedures are for first time set up
only. For future soft top procedures, refer to “Soft Top” in
this section.
1. Locate and remove the following items prior to hard
top removal:
•Right and left door frames
•Door frame attachment knobs (four for two-door
models, six for four-door models)
•Right and left quarter windows
•Rear window
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top Three-
Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Re-
moval” in this section.
3. Install the door frames. Refer to “Door Frame” in this
section.
4. If the soft top has been removed, follow these steps to
reinstall the soft top. If the soft top is on the vehicle,
proceed to step #5.
a. If the pivot brackets have been removed, unzip the
sport bar covers and attach the pivot brackets to the
sports bar with the four screws that were removed
using a #T30 Torx® head driver. Re-cover and
re-zip the sport bar covers.
b. Lay the soft top into the rear of the vehicle with the
bows pointing forward and the curved portion of
the bows facing upward.
c. Reattach the knuckles onto the metal pivot brackets.
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To aid in reattaching the knuckles, you may
carefully tap on the knuckles using a rubber mallet.
d. Screw the pivot screws back into place using a #T30
Torx® head driver. Secure them until they are snug,
being careful not to cross-thread the screws or
overtighten.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the
screws if they are overtightened.
5. Remove the swing gate bar (black metal bar for
bottom of rear window) and set aside.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
NOTE: Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is
not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top.
6. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover. This cover
should be discarded. It was intended as a protective
cover for shipping only.
NOTE: A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dual
top wrap.
7. Put up the soft top. Refer to “Soft Top — Putting Up
The Soft Top” in this section.
DUAL TOP — FOUR-DOOR MODELS — IF
EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, you must
remove one of the tops from the vehicle. If the soft top
is removed, the pivot brackets must also be removed
from the sport bar. The soft top was installed at the
factory for shipping purposes only. The soft top and the
hard top are to be used independently. Removal is
mandatory to prevent any possible wear and tear on the
soft top. Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage
resulting from both tops remaining on the vehicle at the
same time for extended periods of time.
Removing The Soft Top — Four-Door Models
1. Locate and remove the two boxes that contain the
following items:
•Right and left door frames
•Six door frame attachment knobs
•Right and left quarter windows
•Rear window
•Two rear window roll up straps
•Two Sunrider® secure straps (if equipped)
•Two rear swing gate brackets
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top Three-
Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Re-
moval” in this section.
3. Unbutton the side bow tether strap (both sides).
4. Using the plastic reinforcement as a handle, slide the
tether strap up the side bow (both sides).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
5. The tether strap must be hooked onto the pivot
bracket prior to removal of soft top from vehicle (both
sides).
6. Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracket
screws (two per side) from the sport bar using a #T30
Torx® head driver.
7. Lift the soft top in a upward motion to release the
pivot bracket from the sport bar bracket.
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
8. Remove the soft top from the vehicle and store in a
clean, dry location (another person may be needed to
help with this operation).
NOTE: If you are doing this alone, use one arm to hold
the bundle up, the other to remove the brackets.
9. Reinstall the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top Three-
Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Instal-
lation” in this section.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
Installing The Soft Top — Four-Door Models
NOTE: The following procedures are for first time set up
only. For future soft top procedures, refer to “Soft Top” in
this section.
1. Locate and remove the following items prior to hard
top removal:
•Right and left door frames
•Six door frame attachment knobs
•Right and left quarter windows
•Rear window
2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top Three-
Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Re-
moval” in this section.
3. Install the door frames. Refer to “Door Frame” in this
section.
4. Install the soft top with the pivot brackets above the
sport bar brackets, lower the soft top into the sport bar
bracket slots in a downward motion to lock tab on soft
top. You will need to lift the top to get the brackets to
line up. (Another person may be needed to help with
this operation.)
NOTE: If you are doing this alone, use one arm to hold
the soft top up, the other to align the brackets.
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Lower the pivot bracket onto the sport bar bracket
mounting tab in a downward motion to lock into tab.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
6. Screw the pivot screws back into place using a #T30
Torx® head driver. Secure them until they are snug,
being careful not to cross-thread the screws or over-
tighten.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the
screws if they are overtightened.
7. Remove the tether strap from the pivot bracket.
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
8. Using the plastic reinforcement as a handle remove the
tether strap from the bracket hook by sliding strap up
off hook and slide down the side bow (both sides).
9. Button the side bow tether strap (both sides).
10.
Remove the swing gate bar (black metal bar for bottom
of rear window) and set aside.
NOTE:
Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is
not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top.
11. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover. This cover
should be discarded. It was intended as a protective
cover for shipping only.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
NOTE: A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dual
top wrap.
12. Put up the soft top. Refer to “Soft Top — Putting Up
The Soft Top” in this section.
FREEDOM TOP™ THREE-PIECE MODULAR
HARD TOP — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
•The hard top is not designed to carry any addi-
tional loads such as roof racks, spare tires, build-
ing, hunting, or camping supplies, and/or luggage,
etc. Also, it was not designed as a structural mem-
ber of the vehicle, and thus cannot properly carry
any additional loads other than environmental
(rain, snow, etc.).
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame and
bodyside, or fully removed.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
•It is recommended that the top be free of water
prior to panel removal. Removing the top, opening
a door or lowering a window while the top is wet
may allow water to drip into the vehicles interior.
•The hard top assembly must be positioned prop-
erly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can
cause water to leak into the vehicles interior.
(Continued)
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Careless handling and storage of the removable
roof panels may damage the seals, causing water to
leak into the vehicles interior.
•The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicles interior.
Front Panel(s) Removal
NOTE: Left panel must be removed before removing
right panel.
1. Fold down the sun visor, and move it to the side.
2. Turn the rear fasteners (knobs) (located on the over-
head speaker bar assembly) counterclockwise until
they can be removed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
3. Turn the center L-shaped locks (two) from the center
of the roof panel.
4. Turn the rear L-shaped lock (located above the shoul-
der belt anchorage).
5. Unlatch the header panel latch located at the top of the
windshield.
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
6. Remove the left-hand panel.
To remove the right panel, follow the steps above
except for Step 3.
Freedom Top™ Storage Bag
Vehicles equipped with a Freedom Top™ Modular Hard
Top, come with a Freedom Top™ storage bag that allows
you to store your Freedom Top™ panels. The storage bag
contains two compartments and fits behind the rear seat.
Lay the Freedom bag down so the loops and hooks are
facing downward. Unzip the bag and fold back the outer
flap. Release the Velcro on the black panel divider and
fold it back.
NOTE: Ensure the front Freedom Top™ panel latch is
closed prior to inserting the panel into the Freedom bag.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
Insert the right side Freedom panel into the bag with the
latches facing downward.
Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the divider is
laying flat). Secure the Velcro, located at the center of the
divider.
Insert the left-side Freedom panel into the bag with the
latches facing upward.
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Ensure the front Freedom panel latch is closed
prior to inserting the panel into the bag.
Unfold the outer flap and zip the Freedom bag closed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
Install the seat attachment strap (at the top of the bag)
through the loops.
Lift the Freedom bag into the vehicle with the hooks and
straps facing the back of the rear seat. Attach the clips at
the bottom of the bag to the child restraint anchorages,
located at the base of the rear seat.
Wrap the upper strap around the rear head restraints and
loop the strap through the buckle. Pull on the strap to
tighten the Freedom bag securely against the rear seat.
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Panel(s) Installation
NOTE:
Set the panels on the windshield frame so that there
is no overhang. Also, make sure that the panels are sitting
flush with the body.
1. Install the right panel first, then the left panel.
2. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps for removal
in reverse order.
Front Panel(s) Installation With Rear Hard Top
Removed
1. Turn the left and right panels over and move the
spacer block (located on the rear of the panel) upward
90 degrees.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
NOTE: The front panel(s) must be positioned properly
to ensure sealing. Set the panels on the windshield frame
so that there is no overhang. Also, make sure that the
panels are sitting flush with the body.
2. Install the right panel first, then the left panel.
3. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps for removal
in reverse order.
Rear Hard Top Removal
1. Remove both front panels. Refer to “Front Panel(s)
Removal” in this section.
2. Open both doors.
3. Remove the two Torx® head screws that secure the
hard top at the B-pillar (near the top of the door) using
a #40 Torx® head driver (Four–Door Only).
4. Remove the six Torx® head screws that secure the
hard top to the vehicle (along the interior bodyside)
using a #40 Torx® head driver.
5. Open the swing gate all the way to ensure clearance of
the rear window glass. Lift the rear window glass.
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
6. Locate the wire harness on the left rear inside corner of
the vehicle.
7. Release the red locking tab by pulling outward to the
right.
Wire Harness Connector Red Locking Tab
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
8. To remove the wiring harness press the tab and pull
downward to disconnect.
9. To remove the washer hose, pinch the grips on hose
connector and pull downward.
10. Close the swing gate.
11. Remove the hard top from the vehicle. Place the hard
top on a soft surface to prevent damage.
Press Tab To Disconnect
Pinch Grip On Hose
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The removal of the Freedom Top requires four adults
located on each corner. Failure to follow this caution
could damage the Freedom Top.
Rear Hard Top Installation
NOTE: If the door frames are installed from soft top
usage, they must be removed prior to installation of the
hard top.
1. Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if
necessary.
2. Install the hard top using the same steps for removal
in reverse order.
Make sure that the hard top is sitting flush with the body
at the sides and check to ensure that there is a uniform
gap between the lift glass and hard top.
NOTE:
•The Torx fasteners that attach the hard top to the body
should be torqued to 66 in lb +/- 22 in lb (7.5 N·m +/-
2.5 N·m)
•It is not necessary to pinch connection when reinstall-
ing washer hose. Push on until click is heard.
DOOR FRAME
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
•Opening a door or lowering a window while the
top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s
interior.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Careless handling and storage of the removable
door frame(s) may damage the seals, causing water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
•The door frame(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
NOTE:
•Do not drive your vehicle on pavement with the door
frame(s) removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use
during off-road operation only.
•Do not drive your vehicle on publicroads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection that they
can provide. This procedure is furnished for use dur-
ing off-road operation only.
Door Frame Removal
1. Unscrew and remove the door frame attachment
knobs (two per door).
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Use both hands to remove the door frames. The door
frames will fold and could cause injury if both hands
are not used.
2. Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the
front of the door frame.
3. Pull the frame toward you with your rearward hand to
remove the frame from the vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
4. Screw the knobs back into the door frame and fold for
storage. Store in a secure location.
NOTE:
•Do not drive your vehicle on pavement with the door
frame(s) removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use
during off-road operation only.
•Do not drive your vehicle on publicroads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection that they
can provide. This procedure is furnished for use dur-
ing off-road operation only.
Door Frame Installation — Two-Door Models
1. Unfold door frame and unscrew thumbscrews.
2. Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body
side, behind the door opening.
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. After the door frame pin has been set into the body
side hole, carefully set the front of the door frame into
the rubber seal at the top of the windshield.
4. Starting with the front of the door frame, clip it over
the metal side bar and then clip the rear, making sure
that the material for the side bar covers is not pinched
by the door frame.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
5. Starting with the front knob, screw in and tighten both
knobs. Repeat on the other side.
Door Frame Installation — Four-Door Models
1. Install the rear door frame first.
2. Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body
side, just behind the rear door opening.
3. Position the top of the door frame against the metal
sport bar and press onto the side bar making sure not
to pinch the material of the sports bar covers and to
ensure it is properly positioned on the seal above the
front of the rear door.
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Loosely install the rear knob (long knob) to hold the
door rail in position.
5. Carefully set the front of the front door frame in the
rubber seal at the top of the windshield.
6. Clip the front of the door rail over the side bar making
sure that the material for the side bar cover is not
pinched by the door frame.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
7. Position the rear of the front door frame to lay on top
of the front of the rear door frame. Ensure the seals are
installed correctly to avoid water leaks.
8. Loosely install both knobs beginning with the front
knob (long knob). Then, install the middle knob (short
knob) through the front and rear door frames and
screw into the top of the B-pillar.
9. Tighten the front knob, then the rear most knob, and
then the middle knob. Repeat this procedure for the
other side.
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SOFT TOP — TWO-DOOR MODELS
Please visit the owners section of Jeep.com for instruc-
tional videos.
CAUTION!
The soft top is not designed to carry any additional
loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting,
or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was
not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and,
thus, cannot properly carry any additional loads other
than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the top
has been folded down for a period of time, the top will
appear to have shrunk when you raise it, making it
difficult to put up. This is caused by a natural contraction
of the vinyl coating on the fabric top.
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the top
fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and
the top can then be installed. If the temperature is 41°F
(5°C) or below, do not attempt to put the top down or
roll the rear or side curtains.
CAUTION!
•Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax build up may
result.
•Do not lower the top when the temperature is
below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may result.
•Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame, or
fully lowered.
•Do not lower the top with the windows installed.
Window and top damage may occur.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Refer to “Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion. It contains important information on cleaning
and caring for your vehicle’s fabric top.
•Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry or
force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers securing
the soft top. Do not force or pry the soft top
framework when opening or closing. Damage to
the top may result.
WARNING!
•Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window
curtain up unless the side curtains are also re-
moved. Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the
vehicle causing harm to the driver and passengers.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed
only for protection against the elements. Do not
rely on them to contain occupants within the ve-
hicle or to protect against injury during an acci-
dent. Remember, always wear seat belts.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
•It is recommended that the top be free of water
prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a
door or lowering a window while the top is wet
may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
(Continued)
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Careless handling and storage of the soft top may
damage the seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle’s interior.
•The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure
sealing. Improper installation can cause water to
leak into the vehicle’s interior.
Quick Steps To Lowering The Soft Top
Refer to “Lowering The Soft Top” in this section for
further information.
1. Remove the side windows.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
2. Remove the back window.
3. Release header latches from the windshield frame.
4. Release the sail panel retainers from the body side
channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is
helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.
5. As you begin to lower the top, fold the sail panels so
that they rest on top of the soft top.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
6. Release the Sunrider® latch (both sides).
7. Open the swing gate and lower the top.
NOTE: Ensure fabric does not overhang the sides of the
vehicle.
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Quick Steps To Raising The Soft Top
Refer to “Raising The Soft Top” in this section for further
information.
1. Open the swing gate and raise the top, engaging the
Sunrider® latches (another person may be needed to
help with this operation).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
2. Engage header latches. 3. Install rear corner panels.
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Install the back window. 5. Install the side windows.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
6.
Insert the front retainer of the window into the door
channel, making sure the retainer is fully seated and
properly positioned on the door frame. Failure to do so can
result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window.
7. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the
window into the bottom side channel, beginning at the
front and working to the rear of the vehicle. Finish by
closing the zipper completely and attaching the Vel-
cro® along the top and rear of the window. Repeat this
step for the opposite side.
1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lowering The Soft Top
1 — Header Bow 6 — Quarter Window
2 — 2–Bow 7 — Check Strap
3 — 3–Bow 8 — Front Retainer — Quarter Window
4 — Sail Panel 9 — Bottom Retainer — Quarter Window
5 — Body Side Retainer
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
1 — Zipper Start
2 — Zipper Finish
3 — Swing Gate Bar
4 — Swing Gate Brackets
5 — Sail Panels
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Clean side and rear windows before removal to
assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft
top. If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust,
etc., clean them with a mild soap solution and a small
brush. Cleaning products are available through your
authorized dealer.
1. If your vehicle has half doors, remove each half-door
window by opening the door and lifting the half-door
window out.
NOTE: Stow the half-door windows carefully outside of
the vehicle, never inside, to avoid scratches.
2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
3. Release the header latches and leave the hooks in the
loops on the windshield.
4. Open the swing gate.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
5. Before unzipping the rear window, release the first 3 in
(7.6 cm) of both sail panels from the channel. Remove
the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearward out
of the swing gate brackets.
•Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower
corner of the window. Pull the zipper up, across the
top and down to the left lower corner. Zipper pulls
will stay on the rear window. Pull down on the rear
window to disengage it from the zipper on the top
cover.
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
6. Remove the rear window retainer from the swing gate
bracket on both the left and right sides.
7. Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratching.
8. Undo the Velcro® that runs along the top and rear
edge of the side window.
9. Beginning from the rear lower corner, completely
unzip the window.
10. Once unzipped, remove the side window retainers
from the door channel and body side channel. Repeat
this step on the opposite side.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
11. Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body
side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.
NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is
helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.
12. As you begin to lower the top, fold the sail panels so
that they rest on top of the soft top.
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
13. The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed
unless the hard top is being installed. To remove the
swing gate brackets, pull the front of the bracket
forward while rolling the entire bracket back in
toward the vehicle to disengage.
14. Completely release the latches from the loops on the
windshield frame. If your vehicle is not equipped
with the Sunrider® package, proceed to Step 15.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
15. Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid rearward over
the Sunrider® link (Sunrider® Models only).
16. Unlatch the side bows from both door rails (Sun-
rider® Models only).
17. Before lowering the top, open the swing gate to
prevent possible damage to the rear center high-
mounted brake light. Move to the front of the vehicle.
Grasp the side bow behind the header and lift the
top, folding it toward the rear of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Help from another person will ease this operation.
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
18. Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the
bows and as far inward as possible. This will keep
any portion of the top from flapping outside of the
vehicle.
19. Close the front header latches.
20. Remove the door frames, if desired. Refer to “Door
Frame” in this section for further information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
Raising The Soft Top
1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
2. Install door frames, if removed. Refer to “Door Frame”
in this section for further information.
3. Make sure the plastic sleeve is slid over Sunrider® link
(Sunrider® Models only).
4. Standing on the side of the vehicle, lift the top by the
side bow and the 2–bow (middle bow) up and over the
sports bar until the header rests on the top of the
windshield frame.
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Make sure the Sunrider® bracket on the side bows
latches to the door rails (Sunrider® Models only).
6. Open the header latches and engage the hook on each
side onto the windshield loops (do not close the
latches).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
7. If the swing gate brackets were removed, install them
by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior
side of the body channel. Then, rotate it rearward and
over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of
the rail. To be properly located, the bracket must only
be clipped to the shortened rail edge.
8. Move to the rear of the vehicle and gently pull the sail
panels over the rear roof bow.
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
9. Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body
side channel, leaving the last 3 in (7.6 cm) toward the
rear window loose (on both sides). Pulling down on
the rear roof bow (3–bow) will aid to reach the channel
with the retainers.
10.
To install the side windows, affix the window tempo-
rarily by attaching to the Velcro® in the rear corner. Start
the zipper but close only about 1 in (2.5 cm).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
11. Insert the front retainer of the window into the door
channel, making sure the retainer is fully seated and
properly positioned on the door frame. Failure to do
so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to
the window.
1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
12. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the
window into the bottom side channel, beginning at
the front and working to the rear of the vehicle.
Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching
the Velcro® along the top and rear of the window.
Repeat this step for the opposite side.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
13. Locate the black swing gate bar. Slide the swing gate
bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear
window. The spongy part of the seal should be down
and pointed outward to seal with the swing gate
when closed.
14. Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends
at the lower left corner of the rear window opening.
Ensure that the zippers are properly started and
aligned before zipping to prevent damage.
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
15. Run the zipper fully around to the right side of the
window.
16. Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the
swing gate brackets.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
17. Insert the rear window retainer into the swing gate
bracket on both the left and right sides.
18. Apply downward pressure on the top corner of the
rear soft top bow (3–bow), then complete attaching
the sail panel retainers into the body side channel.
19. Close the header latches and return the sun visors to
their secured position.
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SOFT TOP — FOUR-DOOR MODELS
Please visit the owner’s section of Jeep.com for instruc-
tional videos.
CAUTION!
The soft top is not designed to carry any additional
loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting,
or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was
not designed as a structural member of the vehicle, and
thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other
than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the top
has been folded down for a period of time, the top will
appear to have shrunk when you raise it, making it
difficult to put up. This is caused by a natural contraction
of the vinyl coating on the fabric top.
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the top
fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and
the top can then be snapped into place. If the tempera-
ture is 41°F (5°C) or below, do not attempt to put the top
down or roll the rear or side curtains.
CAUTION!
•Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax buildup may
result.
•Do not lower the top when the temperature is
below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may result.
•Do not lower the top when the windows are dirty.
Grit may scratch the window.
•Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame, or
fully lowered.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Do not lower the top with the windows installed.
Window and top damage may occur.
•Refer to “Appearance Care for Fabric Top Models”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion. It contains important information on cleaning
and caring for your vehicle’s fabric top.
•Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry or
force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers securing
the soft top. Do not force or pry the soft top
framework when opening or closing. Damage to
the top may result.
WARNING!
•Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window
curtain up unless the side curtains are also open.
Dangerous exhaust gases which can kill could
enter the vehicle.
•The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed
only for protection against the elements. Do not
rely on them to contain occupants within the ve-
hicle or to protect against injury during an acci-
dent. Remember, always wear seat belts.
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
•It is recommended that the top be free of water
prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a
door or lowering a window while the top is wet
may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
•Careless handling and storage of the soft top may
damage the seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle’s interior.
•The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure
sealing. Improper installation can cause water to
leak into the vehicle’s interior.
NOTE: Do not remove any of the three attachment
knobs unless you are planning on installing the hard top.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
Quick Steps For Lowering The Soft Top
1. Remove the side windows.
2. Remove the back window.
NOTE: Start zipper from the right side to remove back
window.
3. Release header latches from the windshield frame.
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Release the sail panel retainers from the body side
channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.
NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is
helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
5. Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft
top.
6. Fold header rearward, pulling the fabric to the rear.
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
7. Release Sunrider® latch (both sides).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
8. Open the swing gate and lower the top.
NOTE: Ensure the fabric does not overhang the sides of
the vehicle.
Quick Steps For Raising The Soft Top
1. Open the swing gate and raise the top, engaging the
Sunrider® latches (another person may be needed to
help with this operation).
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Install rear corner panels.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
3. Rotate the header forward. 4. Engage the header latches.
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Install the back window. 6. Install the side windows.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
7.
Insert the front retainer of the window into the door
channel, making sure the retainer is fully seated and
properly positioned on the door frame. Failure to do so can
result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window.
8. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the
window into the bottom side channel, beginning at the
front and working to the rear of the vehicle. Finish by
closing the zipper completely and attaching the
Velcro® along the top and rear of the window. Repeat
this step for the opposite side.
1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Down The Soft Top
1 — Header Bow 6 — Body Side Retainer
2 — 2–Bow 7 — Quarter Window
3 — 3–Bow 8 — Check Strap
4 — 4–Bow 9 — Front Retainer — Quarter Window
5 — Sail Panel 10 — Bottom Retainer — Quarter Window
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
1 — Zipper Start
2 — Zipper Finish
3 — Swing Gate Bar
4 — Swing Gate Brackets
5 — Sail Panels
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Clean side and rear windows before removal to
assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft
top. If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust,
etc., clean them with a mild soap solution and a small
brush. Cleaning products are available through your
authorized dealer.
1. If your vehicle has half-doors, remove each half-door
window by opening the door and lifting the half-door
window out.
NOTE: Stow half-door windows carefully outside of the
vehicle, never inside, to avoid scratches.
2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
3. Release the header latches and hooks from the loops
on the windshield frame.
4. Open the swing gate.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
5. Before unzipping the rear window, release the first 3 in
(7.6 cm) of both sail panels from the channel. Remove
the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearward out
of the swing gate brackets.
•Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower
corner of the window. Pull the zipper up, across the
top and down to the left lower corner. Zipper pulls
will stay on the rear window. Pull down on the rear
window to disengage it from the zipper on the top
cover.
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
6. Remove the rear window retainer from the swing gate
bracket on both the left and right sides.
7. Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratching.
8. Undo the Velcro® that runs along the top and rear
edge of the side window.
9. Beginning from the rear lower corner, completely
unzip the window.
10. Once unzipped, remove the side window retainers
from the door channel and body side channel. Repeat
this step on the opposite side.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
11. Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body
side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.
NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is
helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.
12. Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft
top.
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
13. The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed
unless the hard top is being installed. To remove the
swing gate brackets, pull the front of the bracket
forward while rolling the entire bracket back in
toward the vehicle to disengage.
14. Grasp the front side bow behind the header, and lift
the top.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
15. Fold back the front section of the top, pulling the
fabric rearward. Gently rest the header on top of the
rear portion of the deck.
16. Fold the top so that the material forms a ⬙W⬙as
shown. Enter the vehicle and move the material into
two folds.
17.
Release the side bows by pressing down on the latch
above the front of the rear door. Push the top rearward
to disengage. Repeat this step on the other side.
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
18. Before lowering the top, open the swing gate to
prevent possible damage to the rear center high-
mounted brake light. Grasp the folded side bows and
slide the top along the door frame track to the rear
door frame.
19. Gently slide the side bows off the door frame track
and lower the top down into the vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
NOTE:
Help from another person will ease this operation.
20. Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the
bows as far inside as possible. This will keep any
portion of the top from flapping outside of the
vehicle.
21. Once the top is fully down, use the Velcro® straps
provided to secure the top to the vehicle by wrapping
the strap around the side bows and through the slot
on the body.
22. Close the front header latches.
23. Remove the door frames, if desired. Refer to “Door
Frame” in this section for further information.
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Putting Up The Soft Top
NOTE: Be extremely careful when putting up the soft
top to prevent the doors from getting scratched. It may be
helpful to open the rear doors.
1. Install the door frames, if removed. Refer to “Door
Frame” in this section for further information.
2. Undo the straps used to secure the top in the down
position and store in secure location.
3. Open the swing gate.
4. Grasp the folded side bows and lift to the top of the
rear door frames.
NOTE:
Help from another person will ease this operation.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
5. Insert the slider feature of the knuckles into the door
frame tracks and slide the top forward.
6. Ensure that the top locks into the Sunrider® locking
mechanisms that are located above the front of the rear
doors.
7. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
8. Standing on the side of the vehicle, lift the top by the
side bow until it rests on the windshield frame.
9. Open the header latches and engage the hook on each
side onto the windshield loops (do not close the
latches).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
10.
If the swing gate brackets were removed, install them
by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior
side of the body channel. Then, rotate it rearward and
over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of
the rail. To be properly located, the bracket must only
be clipped to the shortened rail edge.
11.
Ensure that the straps are positioned correctly before
pulling the sail panels over the rear roof bow (4–bow).
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body side
channel, leaving the last 3 in (7.6 cm) toward the rear
window loose (on both sides). Pulling down on the rear
roof bow (4–bow) will aid in reaching the channel with
the retainers.
12. To install the side windows, affix the window tem-
porarily by attaching it to the Velcro® in the upper
rear corner. Start the zipper but close only about 1 in
(2.5 cm).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
13. Insert the front retainer of the window into the door
channel, making sure the retainer is fully seated and
properly positioned on the door frame. Failure to do
so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to
the window.
1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
14. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the
window into the bottom side channel, beginning at
the front and working to the rear of the vehicle.
Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching
the Velcro® along the top and rear of the window.
Repeat this step for the opposite side.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
15. Locate the black swing gate bar. Slide the swing gate
bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear
window. The spongy part of the seal should be down
and pointed outward to seal with the swing gate
when closed.
16. Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends
at the lower left corner of the rear window opening.
Ensure that the zippers are properly started and
aligned before zipping to prevent damage.
17. Run the first zipper fully around to the right side of
the window.
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
18. Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the
swing gate brackets.
19. Insert the rear window retainer into the swing gate
bracket on both the left and right sides.
20. Complete the installation of the sail panel by insert-
ing the rest of the retainer into the body channel.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
21. Close the header latches and return the sun visors to
their secured position.
SUNRIDER® (TWO-DOOR MODELS) — IF
EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a
window while the top is wet may allow water to drip
into the vehicle’s interior.
NOTE: If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph
(64 km/h) with the Sunrider® feature open, it is recom-
mended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle.
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening The Sunrider®
1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
2. Release the header latches from the loops on the
windshield frame.
3. Slide the plastic sleeve forward.
4. Grasp the header and lift the top back. Make sure the
material is folded back as shown.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
NOTE: The Sunrider® latch on the door rail should not
be activated for Sunrider® use. If activated, the soft top
must be reinstalled starting from the sail panels.
5.
Locate the straps to secure the side bows. Wrap the
straps around the bows as shown. Repeat on the other
side.
6. Reposition the sun visors.
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Closing The Sunrider®
1. Remove the straps from the side bows.
2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
3. Grasp the front header and pull it to the front of the
vehicle.
4. Hook the header latches to the loops on the wind-
shield frame, close latches, and return the sun visors to
their original positions.
5. Slide the plastic sleeve rearward over the Sunrider®
link.
SUNRIDER® (FOUR-DOOR MODELS) — IF
EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a
window while the top is wet may allow water to drip
into the vehicle’s interior.
NOTE: If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph
(64 km/h) with the Sunrider® feature open, it is recom-
mended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
Opening The Sunrider®
1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
2. Release the header latches from the loops on the
windshield frame.
3. Grasp the front side bow behind the header, and lift
the top.
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Fold back the front section of the top and gently rest
the header on top of the rear portion of the deck.
5. Fold the top so that the material forms a ⬙W⬙as shown.
Enter the vehicle and move the material into two folds.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
6. Secure the top by using the two provided straps. Each
strap will wrap around the side bow and Velcro® to
itself; use one strap on each side of the vehicle.
Closing The Sunrider®
Perform the above steps in the opposite order.
NOTE: Failure to fold the fabric rearward will allow the
material to sag and may block the rearview mirror.
FOLDING WINDSHIELD
The fold-down windshield and removable side bars on
your vehicle are structural elements that can provide
some protection in some accidents. The windshield also
provides some protection against weather, road debris
and intrusion of small branches and other objects.
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield
down and the side bars removed as you lose the protec-
tion these structural elements can provide.
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If required for certain off-road uses, the side bars can be
removed and the windshield folded down. However, the
protection afforded by these features is then lost. If you
remove the side bars and fold down the windshield,
drive slowly and cautiously. It is recommended that the
speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph (16 km/h), with
low range operation preferred if you are driving off-road
with the windshield folded down.
Raise the windshield and reinstall the side bars as soon as
the task that required their removal is completed and
before you return to on-road driving. Both you and your
passenger should wear seat belts at all times, on-road and
off-road, regardless of whether the windshield is raised or
folded down.
Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the doors. If you
choose to remove the doors, see your authorized dealer for
a replacement cowl-mounted outside mirror. Federal law
requires outside mirrors on vehicles for on-road use.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these warnings to help protect
against personal injury:
•Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the wind-
shield down.
•Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is
securely fastened, either up or down.
•Eye protection, such as goggles, should be worn at
all times when the windshield is down.
•Be sure that you carefully follow the instructions
for raising the windshield. Make sure that the
folding windshield, windshield wipers, side bars,
and all associated hardware and fasteners are cor-
rectly and tightly assembled before driving your
vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may
prevent your vehicle from providing you and your
passengers protection in some accidents.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
WARNING! (Continued)
•If you remove the doors, store them outside the
vehicle. In the event of an accident, a loose door
may cause personal injury.
Lowering The Windshield And Removing Side Bars
1. Lower the fabric top or remove the hard top following
the instructions in this manual.
NOTE: To assist in properly reinstalling side bars, mark
the original locations prior to removing.
2. Remove the two top hex bolts (13 mm), and the one
side hex bolt (13 mm) visible through the trim (Do not
remove plastic corner trim, sun visor bolts, or sport
bar covering).
3. Remove the sun visor.
4. Remove the A-pillar cap.
5. Disconnect microphone (if equipped with Uconnect®
phone).
6. Open the sport bar Velcro covering.
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
7. Remove the one hex bolt (13 mm) visible through the
plastic trim on the bottom side of the side bar, one hex
bolt (13 mm) on the side of the side bar, and one hex
bolt (13 mm) on top of the side bar.
NOTE: Pull side bar out horizontally when removing.
CAUTION!
Do not remove the head impact foam from the side
bars, as damage to the foam may result.
NOTE: Store all of the mounting bolts in their original
threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping.
8. Remove the side bar assembly, and reattach the sport
bar Velcro® covering.
9. To safely store the side bars in your vehicle, use four
cinch straps (available from your authorized dealer).
Attach the straps through the slots located on the floor
behind the folded rear seat at the front of the storage
bin cover.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you carry the side
bars loose in your vehicle. Remove the side bars from
the vehicle or securely store them as described or
they may cause personal injury if an accident occurs.
See your authorized dealer for the cinch straps.
10. Remove the windshield wiper arms by first pulling
the wiper away from the windshield and out to the
“lock” position. Unsnap the wiper arm nut caps, and
remove the retaining nuts. Lift the wiper arms off and
store them in the center console or securely behind
the rear seat.
NOTE: It may be necessary to use a battery terminal
puller tool in order to separate the wiper arms from the
shaft after the nuts have been removed.
11. Remove the lower windshield plates by removing the
six black round-headed Torx® head screws (using a
#40 Torx® head driver) on each side of the base of the
windshield.
294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
12. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the
rubber hood bumpers.
13. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap
through the footman hoop on the center of the hood
and on the center of the windshield frame. Tighten
the strap to secure the windshield in place.
Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side Bars
1. Raise the windshield.
2. Loosely attach the rear of the side bar to the sport bar.
Refer to Step 4 of “Lowering Windshield And Remov-
ing Side Bars” earlier in this section. •Reattach the sport bar Velcro® covering.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
3. Attach the front of the side bar to the windshield
frame.
•Install the top two hex bolts (13 mm) first, then the
lower side hex bolt (13 mm). The lower side bolt will
not align until the top two bolts are installed.
4. Tighten all side bar attachment bolts.
5. Install the lower windshield plates with the six black
round-headed Torx® head screws (using a #40 Torx®
head driver) on each side of the base of the wind-
shield.
6. Reinstall the wiper arms.
296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES — HARD TOP ONLY
Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped
A rotary switch on the center portion of the control lever
(located on the right side of the steering column) controls
the operation of the rear wiper/washer function.
Rotate the switch upward to the first detent
position for rear wiper operation.
Rotate the switch upward past the first detent to
activate the rear washer. The washer pump and
the wiper will continue to operate as long as the switch is
held. Upon release, the wiper will cycle two to three
times before returning to the set position.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
to the LOCK position, the wiper will automatically return
to the “Park” position. When the vehicle is restarted, the
wiper will resume function at whichever position the
switch is set at.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297
Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped
The rear window defroster button is located on
the bottom right-side of the blower control knob.
Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster.
An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear
window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes.
For an additional five minutes of operation, press the
button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
•Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........302
䡵INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................303
䡵INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS .....304
䡵COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................319
▫Control Buttons .......................320
▫Compass/Temperature Display ............321
▫Trip Conditions .......................324
䡵ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED ...........325
▫Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays ............................328
▫Oil Change Required ..................329
▫EVIC Main Menu .....................330
▫Compass Display / ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) —
If Equipped .........................330
▫Average Fuel Economy..................334
▫Distance To Empty (DTE) ................334
▫Elapsed Time ........................334
▫EVIC Units Selection (UNITS IN Display) . . . .335
4
▫System Status ........................335
▫Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) ...........................335
䡵Uconnect® 230 — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA
AUX JACK) ..........................339
▫Operating Instructions - Radio Mode........340
▫Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD
and MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO) . . .348
▫Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files.........350
▫LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/
WMA Play)..........................353
▫INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/
WMA Play)..........................353
▫Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . .355
䡵Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/
NAV — IF EQUIPPED ...................360
▫Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped .................360
▫Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
Equipped ...........................360
䡵Uconnect® 130 ........................360
▫Operating Instructions — Radio Mode.......360
▫Operation Instructions — CD MODE For
CD And MP3 Audio Play ................363
▫Notes on Playing MP3 Files ..............366
▫Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode .....368
䡵Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO .....369
▫Operating Instructions — Radio Mode.......369
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫Operation Instructions — CD MODE for
CD and MP3 Audio Play ................375
▫Notes On Playing MP3 Files ..............377
▫LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) .......380
▫INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) ......380
▫Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . .381
䡵iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED .........................386
▫Connecting The iPod® Or External USB
Device .............................386
▫Using This Feature.....................387
▫Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons ...................387
▫Play Mode ..........................388
▫List Or Browse Mode...................389
▫Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) .........391
䡵STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ......392
▫Radio Operation ......................393
▫CD Player ...........................394
䡵CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ...........394
䡵RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .395
䡵CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................395
▫Manual Heating And Air Conditioning ......395
▫Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped ...........................399
▫Operating Tips .......................405
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 7 — Climate Controls
2 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Power Outlet
3 — Radio 9 — Lower Switch Bank
4 — Assist Handle 10 — Power Mirror Switch — If Equipped
5 — Glove Compartment 11 — Horn
6 — Power Window Switches
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
2. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, and remain
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes
on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-
essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at
idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means
that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the
charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See
an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
3. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
4. Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.8 gal
(10.6L) this light will turn on and a single chime
will sound.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
6. Front Axle Lock Indicator — If Equipped
Indicates when the front axle lock has been
activated.
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will flash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
8. Turn Signal Indicators
The left or right arrow will flash with the corre-
sponding exterior turn signal lights when the turn
signal lever is operated. A chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.
9. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started; if the bulb does not come on, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer. If the light turns on
while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as
soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
10. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam head-
lights are on. Push the multifunction control lever
away from you to switch the headlights to high beam.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to
low beam. If the driver’s door is open, and the headlights
or park lights are left on, the high beam indicator light
will remain illuminated and a chime will sound.
11. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
12. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
After the ignition is turned on, the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indicate
function check at vehicle start-up. If the light remains on
after start-up or comes on and stays on at road speeds, it
may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or
has become inoperative. The system reverts to standard
non-anti-lock brakes.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning
Light are on, see an authorized dealer immediately. Refer to
“Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting And Operating”.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
13. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
14. Rear Axle Lock Indicator — If Equipped
This light indicates when the rear axle lock has
been activated.
15. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
pointer in the red area. Engine damage will occur.
16. Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off.
Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the
vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
NOTE: As the coolant temperature gauge approaches
⬙H,⬙this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will
sound. Further overheating will cause the temperature
gauge to pass ⬙H.⬙In this case, a continuous chime will
sound, until the engine is allowed to cool or the 4 minutes
duration is expired, whichever come first.
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
18. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off imme-
diately and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You
may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood
yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the
warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap para-
graph.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
19. Cruise Indicator
This indicator shows when the electronic speed
control system is turned on.
20. 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive mode, and the front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked to-
gether forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed.
21. Odometer / Trip Odometer / ECO (Fuel Saver Indi-
cator) Button
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings or the “ECO”
display. Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip
odometer mode. Press and hold the button for two
seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilome-
ters. The odometer must be in trip mode to reset.
22. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
23. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and in-
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should deter-
mine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
24. Odometer / Trip Odometer Display Area
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven. The trip odometer shows indi-
vidual trip mileage. Refer to “Odometer / Trip Odometer
/ ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) Button” for additional
information.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Odometer Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
odometer messages will display:
ECO .....................Fuel Saver Indicator
door .............................Door Ajar
gATE ........................Swing Gate Ajar
LoW tirE ....................LowTirePressure
HOTOIL ...........Transmission Oil Temperature
Above Normal Limits
gASCAP ......................Fuel Cap Fault
noFUSE ..........................Fuse Fault
CHAngE OIL ..............OilChange Required
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
The ECO indicator will illuminate when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
LoW tirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer display
will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles.
“HOTOIL” Transmission Temperature Warning Message
The “HOTOIL” cluster message will appear in the odometer
accompanied with a chime to indicate that there is excessive
transmission fluid temperature that might occur with severe
usage such as trailer towing. It may also occur when
operating the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condi-
tion, such as 4-wheel drive operation (e.g., snow plowing,
off-road operation). If this “HOTOIL” message turns on,
stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the
transmission in NEUTRAL until the message turns off.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture “HOTOIL” Warning message illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission damage or
transmission failure.
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature “HOTOIL” Warn-
ing message is illuminated and you continue operat-
ing the vehicle, in some circumstances you could
cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot
engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
gASCAP
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
noFUSE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odom-
eter display area. For further information on fuses and
fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”.
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CHAngE OIL Message
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “CHANgE OIL” message will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty-cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of
an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the ignition
is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb does
not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/
RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several typical driving styles. In most
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
drivability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
26. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that
caused the ESC activation.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent acci-
dents, including those resulting from excessive speed
in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. The capabilities of an ESC-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
27. O/D (Overdrive) OFF Indicator Light
This light will illuminate when the O/D OFF
button has been selected and overdrive has been
turned off. The O/D OFF button is located on the center
console.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
28. Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front
sway bar is disconnected.
29. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC) is off.
30. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is run-
ning, the light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when
the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the shift
lever is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running,
your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN
and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not
come on during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
31.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display /
Compass Mini-Trip Computer Display — If Equipped
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages. For further information, refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center”.
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Mini-Trip Computer messages. Refer to “Mini-
Trip Computer” for further information.
COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED
The Compass/Trip Computer features a driver-interactive
display (displays information on outside temperature, com-
pass direction, and trip information). It is located on the
lower left part of the cluster below the speedometer.
Compass Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
Control Buttons
The Compass/Temperature control buttons are located
on the left spoke of the steering wheel.
Press and release the STEP button on the steering wheel
to access the options in the Compass display.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated tempera-
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
The following displays can be reset or changed:
•Compass/Temperature
•AVG ECO (changes to present fuel economy)
•ET (will reset display)
•DTE (distance to empty)
These messages can be cycled through by pressing the
STEP button on the steering wheel. To reset the AVG ECO
or ET, press and hold the STEP button for approximately
three seconds.
Mini-Trip Control Buttons
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass/Temperature Display
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with a Chrysler
Uconnect® gps (Navigation Radio), the NAV system will
provide the compass direction, and the variance and
calibration menus will be unavailable. The compass will
perform accurately, based on GPS signals instead of the
Earth’s magnetic field.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
the compass will automatically compensate for the differ-
ences and provide the most accurate compass heading.
Compass Variance Map
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
To Set The Variance
Start the engine and leave the transmission gear selector
lever in the PARK position. Press and hold the RESET
button on the steering wheel (for approximately ten sec-
onds) until the current variance zone number is dis-
played. To change the zone, press and release the STEP
button to increase the variance one step. Repeat as
necessary until the desired variance is achieved.
NOTE: The factory default zone is 8. During program-
ming, the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to
zone 1.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic, inaccurate or abnormal,
you may wish to calibrate the compass. Prior to calibrat-
ing the compass, make sure the proper zone is selected.
1. Start the engine and leave the transmission in the
PARK position.
2. Press and hold the RESET button (for approximately
10 seconds) until the current variance zone number is
displayed.
3. Release the RESET button, then press and hold again
for approximately 10 seconds, until the direction is
displayed, with the CAL indicator on continuously in
the display.
4. To complete the compass calibration, drive the vehicle
in one or more complete 360–degree circles, under
5 mph (8 km/h) in an area free from power lines and
large metallic objects, until the CAL indicator turns
off. The compass will now function normally.
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
•A good calibration requires a level surface and an
environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad
tracks, etc.
•Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top
of the center of the instrument panel. This is where the
compass sensor is located.
Average Fuel Economy / Distance To Empty (DTE) /
Elapsed Time
•Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the digits will go blank
while the history information is erased. The averaging
will restart when enough new distance and fuel data is
accumulated.
•Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset.
•Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is
in the RUN or START positions. The elapsed timer
displays minutes:seconds. After 59minutes:59seconds, it
displays hours:minutes:seconds.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
Trip Conditions
Trip Odometer (ODO) / ECO (Fuel Saver
Indicator) — If Equipped
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Press and release the right button (on the instru-
ment cluster) to switch from odometer to Trip A or Trip B
or to ECO. Press and hold the right button while the
odometer/trip odometer is displayed to reset.
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last
reset.
Trip Display Button
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last
reset.
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
The ECO indicator will illuminate when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pressing the switches
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
following:
•Compass Heading (N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE, SW)
•Outside Temperature (°F or °C)
•ECO Display
•Fuel Economy
•Miles/kilometers To Empty
•Timer
•Display Units Selection
•System Warnings (Door Ajar, etc.)
•Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
•Tire Pressure Monitor System (If Equipped)
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MENU Button
Press and release the MENU button to advance
the display to each of the EVIC Main Menu
features or to return to the Main Menu from a
sub-menu. Upon reaching the last item in the
Main Menu the EVIC will advance to the first item in the
Main Menu with the next MENU button press and
release.
COMPASS Button
Press and release the COMPASS button to
return to the Compass/Outside Temperature/
Audio Information/ECO screen whenever the
current display is not the Compass/Outside
Temperature/Audio Information/ECO screen.
SELECT Button
Press and release the SELECT button when
prompted by the EVIC to Reset Main Menu
features with a reset capability or to change
Personal Settings.
DOWN Button
Press and release the DOWN button when
prompted by the EVIC to step through stored
system warning messages or Personal Settings
features.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages:
•Low Tire Pressure
•Service TPM System (refer to ⬙Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing System⬙in ⬙Starting and Operating⬙)
•Premium TPM System Graphic Display
•Damaged Key
•Key in Ignition
•Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime)
•Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
•Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
•Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
•Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
•Key Fob Battery Low (with a single chime)
•Personal Settings Not Avail. – Vehicle Not in Park —
automatic transmission
•Personal Settings Not Avail. – Vehicle in Motion —
manual transmission
•Door Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which door is
open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in
motion).
•Gate Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing the Liftgate/
back door open and A single chime )
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting
And Operating” for more details)
•Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
•ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — if equipped
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec-
onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform
the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Do not
start the engine.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
EVIC Main Menu
To step to each main menu feature press and release the
MENU button once for each step. A step from the last
item in the list will cause the first item in the feature list
to be displayed. The following features are in the Main
menu:
•Compass, Outside Temperature, and ECO display
•Average Fuel Economy
•Distance to Empty
•Elapsed Time
•EVIC Units Selection
•System Status
•Personal Settings
•Tire PSI
NOTE: For features in the EVIC that can be reset (Aver-
age Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time), the EVIC prompts
a reset with a SELECT button graphic and the word
RESET next to it.
When the SELECT button is pressed, the selected feature
will reset and RESET ALL will display next to the
SELECT button graphic. Pressing SELECT a second time
will reset both Average Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time.
After three seconds without pressing SELECT, RESET
ALL will return to RESET and only the selected feature
will have been reset.
Compass Display / ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — If
Equipped
The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing. Press and release the COMPASS button to display
one of eight compass headings, the outside temperature/
ECO if the EVIC display is not already displaying this
screen.
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated tempera-
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — If Equipped
The ECO message will display below the outside tem-
perature in the EVIC display (if the audio system is on
the ECO indicator will override the audio information
display line if the ⬙Display Fuel Saver⬙personal setting is
ON — see ⬙Personal Settings⬙section). This message will
appear whenever you are driving in a fuel efficient
manner.
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in
the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
NOTE:
A good calibration requires a level surface and an
environment free from large metallic objects such as build-
ings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” indicator
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in PARK in order
to enter the EVIC Programming Menus.
2.
Press the MENU button until Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) displays in the EVIC.
3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass”
displays in the EVIC.
4.
Press and release the SELECT button to start the calibra-
tion. The “CAL” indicator will display in the EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the
“CAL” indicator turns off. The compass will now
function normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
the compass will automatically compensate for the differ-
ences and provide the most accurate compass heading.
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the top of the instrument panel; this is where the compass
sensor is located.
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To Change The Compass Variance:
1. Turn the ignition switch RUN (it is not necessary to
start the engine).
2. Press the MENU button until Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) displays in the
EVIC.
3. Press the DOWN button until “Compass Variance”
message and the last variance zone number displays
in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
variance zone is selected according to the map.
5. Press and release the COMPASS button to exit.
Compass Variance Map
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
Average Fuel Economy can be reset by pressing and
holding the SELECT button (as prompted in the EVIC
display). Upon reset, the history information will be
erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel
average reading before the reset.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE display value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL”. This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is
in the RUN or START position.
Elapsed time is displayed as follows:
hours:minutes:seconds
Elapsed time can be reset by pressing and holding the
SELECT button (as prompted in the EVIC display). Upon
reset all digits will change to zeros and time will start
incrementing again if the ignition switch is in RUN or
START.
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EVIC Units Selection (UNITS IN Display)
Displays the units used for the Outside Temperature,
Average Fuel Economy and Distance to Empty features.
Press and Release the SELECT button to toggle units
between ⬙U.S.⬙and ⬙METRIC⬙.
System Status
Displays SYSTEM OK if there are no active Warning
Messages stored. Pressing and releasing the DOWN
button when SYSTEM OK is displayed will do nothing.
Displays SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT if there are
active Warning Messages stored. Pressing and releasing
the DOWN button when SYSTEM WARNINGS PRES-
ENT is displayed will display each stored warning for
each button press. Press and Release the MENU button to
return to the Main Menu.
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph (0 km/h)
(manual transmission) or when the shift lever is in PARK
(auto transmission).
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set-
tings displays in the EVIC.
Use the DOWN button to display one of the following
choices:
Language
When in this display you may select one of five lan-
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the SELECT button while in this display to select English,
Espanol or Francais. Then, as you continue, the informa-
tion will display in the selected language.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
Auto Lock Doors
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or
disabled, to make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Auto Unlk On Exit
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until “On” or “Off” appears.
RKE Unlock
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen-
ger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
press and release the SELECT button until “Driver Door
1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
Sound Horn With Lock
When on is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the Flash Lamp with
Lock feature. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until “On” or “Off” appears.
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Flash Lamp with Lock
When on is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the Sound Horn with Lock feature selected. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until “On” or “Off” appears.
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until “0,” “30,” “60,” or
“90” appears.
Headlamps with Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When on is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. If the
headlights were turned on by this feature they will also
turn off when the wipers are turned off. To make your
selection, press and release the SELECT button until
“ON” or “OFF” appears.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Key Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature.
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until “Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” or “10 min.”
appears.
Illumin. Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-
tion, press and hold the SELECT button until “Off,”
“30 sec,” “60 sec,” or “90 sec” appears.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
Operating” for system function and operating informa-
tion. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until “On” or “Off” appears.
Display Units In
The EVIC can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. The units apply to the Outside Tem-
perature, Average Fuel Economy, and Distance to Empty.
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until “U.S.” or ⬙METRIC⬙appears.
Nav–Turn By Turn — If Equipped
When on enables display of Navigation System street
name, turn direction, and distance to turn information in
the EVIC. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until “On” or “Off” appears.
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display Fuel Saver — If Equipped
The “ECO” message is located in the compass / outside
temperature / audio information / ECO display. If
Display Fuel Saver is selected as ON, only the ECO
message will display in the audio information / ECO line
of the display. If Display Fuel Saver is selected as OFF,
only the audio information will display in the audio
information / ECO line of the display when the audio
system is on. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Compass Variance
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Calibrate Compass
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Uconnect® 230 — AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND
6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX JACK)
Uconnect® 230
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously
(360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turn-
ing the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases
the volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Voice Command Button Uconnect® Phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” for further
details.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
Phone Button Uconnect® Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further
details.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL con-
trol knob to save the time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and
selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in this
display follow the above procedure, starting at step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within
five seconds will allow the program format type to be
selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type 16-Digit Character
Display
No program type or
undefined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
Program Type 16-Digit Character
Display
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R & B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
•DISC Play/Pause -
You can toggle between playing the DVD and
pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT
button (if equipped).
•DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
•Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are avail-
able on the disc (if equipped).
•Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).
•Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).
NOTE:
•The available selections for each of the above entries
varies depending upon the disc.
•
These selections can only be made while playing a DVD.
•VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and OFF
(if equipped).
•VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls
(if equipped).
•VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the mode
of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
•Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
•Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items and set
defaults according to customer preference.
Menu Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
number and then push to select.
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitles — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
Off or On.
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the
SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both
AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into pushbutton
memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be
selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙insert the CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙when the disc is
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD and MP3/MWA modes.
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•Maximum number of directory levels: 8
•Maximum number of files: 255
•Maximum number of folders: 100
•Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
•Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play-
back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency
(kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
WMA
Specification
Sampling
Frequency
(kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
WMA 44.1 and 48 48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are
supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
•Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, an ipod®, or a microphone and
utilize the vehicles audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
NOTE:
The AUX device must be turned on and the device’s
volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud
enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX audio
sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display for
five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions — Voice Command System
(If Equipped)
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect® Phone
(If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES™) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Video Entertainment System (VES™)” for fur-
ther details.
Dolby®
Manufactured under license from Dolby® Laboratories.
Dolby® and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby® Laboratories.
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
DTS™
“DTS™ and “DTS™ 2.0” are trademarks of Digital The-
ater Systems, Inc.
Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at
www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect® (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙appears in the display.
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect® (Satellite)
Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode
for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five sec-
onds will allow the program format type to be selected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory
can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/
NAV — IF EQUIPPED
Refer to your Uconnect® user’s manual for detailed
operating instructions.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.
Uconnect® 130
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
Uconnect® 130
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio.
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn
off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 de-
grees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the vol-
ume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL con-
trol knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to
pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The sym-
bol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the
button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station and press
and release that button. If a button is not selected within five
seconds after pressing the SET/RND button, the station will
continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton
memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the
SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both
AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations
to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in
SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
will show the track number, and index time in minutes
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
•Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file
recording media and formats are limited. When writing
MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•Maximum number of files: 255
•Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
•Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an
MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR
bit rate.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency
(kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or iPod®, and utilize the vehicle’s audio
system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turn-
ing the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases
the volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Uconnect® 130
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fea-
tures If Your Vehicle”.
Voice Command Button Uconnect® Phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” in “Under-
standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button Uconnect® Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” in “Under-
standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL con-
trol knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within
five seconds will allow the program format type to be
selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type 16-Digit Character
Display
No program type or
undefined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Program Type 16-Digit Character
Display
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The Music
Type function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
•Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL con-
trol knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
save time change.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
•This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
dom Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file
recording media and formats are limited. When writing
MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•Maximum number of files: 255
•Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
•Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency
(kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio
checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot
of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start
playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or iPod® and utilize the vehicle’s audio
system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you may
begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service
that is included with the factory-installed satellite radio
system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that
contains general information, including how to setup your
on-line listening account. For further information, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at
www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian
residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect® (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙appears in the display.
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect® (Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode
for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five sec-
onds will allow the program format type to be selected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory
can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions - Uconnect® Phone
(If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the center console.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
NOTE:
•If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
UconnectMultimedia radio User’s Manual for iPod®
or external USB device support capability.
•Connecting an iPod® or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod® /MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.
Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod® or external
USB device to the vehicles USB/AUX connector port
which is located in the center console.
Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
the vehicles iPod®/USB/MP3 control system (iPod® or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
pressing radio switches, as described below.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis-
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using an iPod® cable, or an external USB device to
connect to the USB port:
•The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
•The audio device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod® contents.
•The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
audio device).
Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons
To get into the iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode and
access a connected audio device, either press the “AUX”
button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and
say ⬙USB⬙or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
Play Mode
When switched to iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode, the
iPod® or external USB device automatically starts Play
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
faceplate may be used to control the iPod® or external
USB device and display data:
•Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous track.
•Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙.
•Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,
will jump to the previous track in the list or press the
VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
•Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button
long enough will jump to the beginning of the current
track.
•Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF>> button.
•
A single press backward << RW or forward FF>> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five sec-
onds.
•Use the << SEEK and SEEK>> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK>> button
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
Track⬙.
•While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙or ⬙Repeat
Off⬙.
•Press the SCAN button to use iPod®/USB/MP3 de-
vice scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of
each track in the current list and then forward to the
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
<< SEEK and SEEK>> buttons will select the previous
and next tracks.
•RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod® or external USB
device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙or
⬙Shuffle Off⬙.IftheRND icon is showing on the radio
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
•TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
device or external USB device.
•Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise
(backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the
track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be
played is highlighted on the radio display, press the
TUNE control knob to select and start playing the
track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll
through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight
delay in updating the information on the radio
display may be noticeable.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
•During all List modes, the iPod® displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom
of the list, just turn the wheel backward (counter-
clockwise) to get to the track faster.
•In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod® or
external USB device.
•Preset 1 – Playlists
•Preset 2 – Artists
•Preset 3 – Albums
•Preset 4 – Genres
•Preset 5 – Audiobooks
•Preset 6 – Podcasts
•Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on the
second line.
•
To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode.
•LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod® or external USB device. Turn
the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod® or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
•MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
•Leaving the iPod® or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in ex-
treme heat or cold can alter the operation or dam-
age the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s
guidelines.
•Placing items on the iPod® or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod® or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
Uconnect® phone system.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To enter BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on the
radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth Stream-
ing Audio”.
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect®
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect® phone system, but just one can be selected
and played.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
Selecting A Different Audio Device
1. Press the PHONE button to begin.
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and following the beep, say
⬙Setup⬙, then say ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙.
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the
Uconnect® phone system to list the audio devices.
Next Track
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
radio and say “Next Track”, to jump to the next music
track on your cellular phone.
Previous Track
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
the radio and say “Previous Track”, to jump to the
previous music track on your cellular phone.
Browse
Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth Streaming
Audio (BTSA) device. Only the current song that is
playing will display info.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
CD/HDD/AUX/VES, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
center button will select the next available CD in the
player.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or
have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your
vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your
radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not
harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not
satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off
during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect®
(if equipped).
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
Manual Temperature Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the ven-
tilation system in any mode. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control to the right from the “O”
(OFF) position. There are seven blower
speeds.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the tem-
perature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the dial left
into the blue area of the scale indicates
cooler temperatures, while rotating
right into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt
or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Rotate this control to choose from sev-
eral patterns of air distribution. You
can select either a primary mode as
identified by the symbols on the con-
trol, or a blend of two of these modes.
The closer the setting is to a particular
symbol, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
for maximum airflow to the rear.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE:
For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there is a
difference in temperature between the upper and lower
outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets. This
feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool
conditions.
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small
amount flowing through the defrost and side win-
dow demist outlets.
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix,
Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehu-
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
Recirculation Control
Pressing the Recirculation Control button will
put the system in recirculation mode. This can
be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are pres-
ent. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the
control button to illuminate.
NOTE:
•Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select
the outside air position for maximum defogging.
•The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode
control is set to panel or Bi-Level.
•The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection.
•When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to engage the Air Con-
ditioning. A light will illuminate when
the Air Conditioning system is engaged.
Rotating the dial left into the blue area of
the scale indicates cooler temperatures,
while rotating right into the red area
indicates warmer temperatures.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
•MAX A/C
For maximum cooling, turn on the A/C and recirculation
buttons at the same time.
•ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
Automatic Operation
The Automatic Temperature Control system automati-
cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at
the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
Automatic Temperature Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
Operation of the system is quite simple.
1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the
Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat
occupants only.
Dial in the temperature you would like
the system to maintain by rotating the
Temperature Control knob. Once the
comfort level is selected, the system will
maintain that level automatically using
the heating system. Should the desired
comfort level require air conditioning,
the system will automatically make the adjustment.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the
system completely and closes the outside air intake.
The recommended setting for maximum comfort is 72° F
(22° C) for the average person; however, this may vary.
NOTE:
•The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
without affecting automatic operation.
•Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in
AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button
to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates
that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the
air conditioning is not necessary.
•If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located
in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blower Control
For full automatic operation or for
automatic blower operation, turn the
knob to the AUTO position. In manual
mode, there are seven blower speeds
that can be individually selected. In off
position, the blower will shut off.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Pre-
ferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
Operation Chart that follows for details.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
•Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
for maximum airflow to the rear.
•Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
•Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and
side window demist outlets.
•Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
•Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
•Air Conditioner Control
Press this button to turn on the air
conditioning during manual operation
only. When the air conditioning is
turned on, cool dehumidified air will
flow through the outlets selected with
the Mode control dial. Press this but-
ton a second time to turn OFF the air
conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when
manual compressor operation is selected.
•Recirculation Control
The system will automatically control recircu-
lation. However, pressing the Recirculation
Control button will put the system in recircu-
lation mode. This can be used when outside
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity
are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in
the control button to illuminate.
NOTE:
•When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
•In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in the defrost mode in order to
improve window clearing. Recirculation will be dis-
abled automatically if in defrost mode.
•Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
press the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
interior air to condense on windows and hamper
visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
recirculation to be selected while in defrost mode.
Attempting to use recirculation while in these modes
will cause the LED in the control button to blink and
then turn off.
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you
can temporarily put the system into Recirculation
mode by pressing the Recirculation button. However,
under certain conditions, while in Automatic mode,
the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When
these conditions are present, and the Recirculation
button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then turn
off. This tells you that you are unable to go into
Recirculation mode at this time. If you would like the
system to go into Recirculation mode, you must first
move the Mode knob to Panel, Bi-Level and then press
the Recirculation button. This feature reduces the
possibility of window fogging.
Operating Tips
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% OAT
(Organic Additive Technology) coolant that meets the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106
and 50% water is recommended. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
coolant selection.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods as fogging may occur.
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
Floor, Mix, or Defrost mode. The air is directed at the area
of the windows through which you view the outside
mirrors.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from enter-
ing the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from outside the
vehicle and recirculated air within the passenger compart-
ment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service information or see
your authorized dealer for service. Refer to “Maintenance
Schedules” for filter service intervals.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵STARTING PROCEDURES ................414
▫Manual Transmission – If Equipped ........414
▫Automatic Transmission – If Equipped ......415
▫Normal Starting.......................415
▫Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) ................416
▫If Engine Fails To Start .................416
▫After Starting ........................418
䡵ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .418
䡵MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .418
▫Shifting.............................419
▫Downshifting ........................420
▫Reverse Shifting ......................422
䡵AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................422
▫Key Ignition Park Interlock...............424
▫Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .424
▫Five-Speed Automatic Transmission ........424
▫Gear Ranges .........................426
5
䡵FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
(COMMAND-TRAC I® OR ROCK-TRAC®) . . . .433
▫Operating Instructions/Precautions ........433
▫Shift Positions ........................435
▫Shifting Procedure .....................436
䡵TRAC-LOK® REAR AXLE — IF EQUIPPED . . .437
䡵AXLE LOCK (TRU–LOK®) — RUBICON
MODELS ............................438
䡵ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................439
䡵ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS ................441
䡵OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS ................442
▫Side Step Removal – If Equipped ..........442
▫The Basics Of Off-Road Driving ...........443
▫When To Use 4L (Low) Range.............443
▫Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation. . .444
▫Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand ..........444
▫Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other
High Points) .........................446
▫Hill Climbing ........................448
▫Driving Through Water .................451
▫After Driving Off-Road .................453
䡵POWER STEERING .....................455
▫Power Steering Fluid Check ..............456
䡵PARKING BRAKE ......................456
䡵ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM .............459
䡵ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .460
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫Traction Control System (TCS) ............461
▫Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............462
▫Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................463
▫Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..........466
▫Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........467
▫ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light ........472
▫Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ..............473
▫Hill Descent Control (HDC) – If Equipped . . .474
䡵TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............476
▫Tire Markings ........................476
▫Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........479
▫Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........481
▫Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........482
䡵TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION.........487
▫Tire Pressure ........................487
▫Tire Inflation Pressures .................489
▫Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .490
▫Radial Ply Tires ......................491
▫All Season Tires – If Equipped ............491
▫Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped. .492
▫Snow Tires ..........................492
▫Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped................493
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
▫Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped .........493
▫Full Size Spare – If Equipped .............494
▫Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped ..........494
▫Tire Spinning ........................495
▫Tread Wear Indicators ..................496
▫Life Of Tire .........................496
▫Replacement Tires .....................497
䡵TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......499
䡵TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....500
䡵TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .501
▫Premium and Base TPM System ...........504
▫Premium System – If Equipped............508
▫General Information ...................512
䡵FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................513
▫3.6L Engine ..........................513
▫Reformulated Gasoline .................513
▫Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............514
▫E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......514
▫MMT In Gasoline .....................515
▫Materials Added To Fuel ................515
▫Fuel System Cautions...................516
▫Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............517
䡵ADDING FUEL ........................517
▫Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...............517
▫Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............519
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵VEHICLE LOADING ....................519
▫Certification Label ....................519
䡵TRAILER TOWING .....................522
▫Common Towing Definitions .............522
▫Trailer Hitch Classification ...............525
▫Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ......................526
▫Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............532
▫Towing Requirements ..................533
▫Towing Tips .........................538
䡵RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) ............540
▫Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .540
▫Recreational Towing – Four-Wheel Drive
Models .............................541
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
•When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEU-
TRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the
vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlock-
ing ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch
pedal is pressed to the floor.
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
Four-Wheel Drive Models Only
In 4L mode, this vehicle will start regardless of whether
or not the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor. This feature
enhances off-road performance by allowing the vehicle to
start when in 4L without having to press the clutch pedal.
The “4WD Indicator Light” will illuminate when the
transfer case has been shifted into this mode.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Start the vehicle with the shift lever in the PARK position
(vehicle can also be started in NEUTRAL). Apply the
brake before shifting to any driving range.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
Tip Start Feature – Automatic Transmission Only
Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will continue to run, but will automatically disengage
itself when the engine is running. If the engine fails to
start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 sec-
onds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
•Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and, once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen-
cies” for further information.
Without Tip Start – Manual Transmission Only
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-
dures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the
engine. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded.
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accel-
erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15–second
periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the
floor, repeat the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold
Weather” procedures.
With Tip Start – Automatic Transmission Only
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 sec-
onds before trying again.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is found under the hood
bundled in front of the battery tray.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt AC
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch.
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in-
creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid
warms up. This is normal.
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal.
You should always use first gear when starting from a
standing position.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both
fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as
listed in recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the
vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily
loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up-shift
speeds may not apply.
Shift Pattern
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Engine Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
3.6L Accel. 15 (24) 24 (39) 34 (55) 47 (76) 56 (90)
Cruise 10 (16) 19 (31) 27 (43) 37 (60) 41 (66)
NOTE: Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for
2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be signifi-
cantly less.
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving down
steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time
provides better acceleration when you desire to resume
speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to
avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip, and the vehicle could skid.
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift
one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine
which can cause valve damage, and/or clutch disc
damage, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended down-
shifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed
and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch
pedal is pressed.
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1
Maximum
Speed
80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)
NOTE: Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for
2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be signifi-
cantly less.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
Reverse Shifting
To shift into REVERSE, bring the vehicle to a complete
stop. Press the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear
train to stop rotating. Beginning from the NEUTRAL
position, move the shift lever in one quick, smooth
motion straight across and into the REVERSE area (the
driver will feel a firm “click” as the shifter passes the
“knock-over”). Complete the shift by pulling the shift
lever into REVERSE.
The “knock-over” prevents the driver from accidentally
entering the REVERSE shift area and warns the driver
that they are about to shift the transmission into RE-
VERSE. Due to this feature, a slow shift to REVERSE can
be perceived as a high shift effort.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
•Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
•Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is
removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK, secur-
ing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
•When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
•Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
WARNING! (Continued)
•It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF position. The key can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position,
and the shift lever is locked in PARK whenever the
ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must
press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK
(refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in
this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or
NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual down-
shifts can be made using the Autostick® shift control
(refer to ⬙AutoStick®⬙in this section) or (when the
transfer case is in the 4L range) the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range
Select (ERS) Operation” in this section). Moving the shift
lever to the left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position
will manually select the transmission gear (or, when the
transfer case is in the 4L range, the highest available
transmission gear) and will display that gear in the
instrument cluster as 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
Shift Lever
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE:
•After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
•If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle
the ignition to the OFF position before restarting.
Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after
restarting the engine if the key is not cycled to the OFF
position first.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
•
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of park (with the brake
pedal released). Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
•
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the
brake pedal.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and
remove the ignition key. Once the ignition key is
removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
•When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key and lock your vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
WARNING! (Continued)
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
•Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must cycle the ignition switch from the OFF posi-
tion to the ON/RUN position, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever
could result.
•DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
•When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
•Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
•With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift
control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section) to select a
lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear
will improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop.
After the vehicle has stopped, the transmission will
remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear
is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will con-
tinue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control is only used
when the transfer case is in the 4L (Low) range. In the
transfer case 2H and 4H (High) positions, the AutoStick®
shift control is available (refer to ⬙AutoStick®⬙in this
section).
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear when the
transfer case is in the 4L (Low) position, and the shift
lever is in the DRIVE position. For example, if you shift
the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will
never shift above third gear, but will shift down into
second and first gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically, shift-
ing between all available gears. Tapping the shift lever to
the left (-) will downshift the transmission, activate ERS
mode, display the current gear in the instrument cluster,
and maintain that gear as the top available gear. Once in
ERS mode, tapping the shift lever to the left (-) or right (+)
will change the top available gear.
To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the shift lever to
the right (+) until “D” is once again displayed in the shift
lever position indicator in the instrument cluster.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
Screen Display 12 34D
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed
1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), tap the shift lever to the
left (-) repeatedly as the vehicle slows. The transmission
will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be
slowed down.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (fifth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con-
ditions are present:
•the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
•vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
•the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
(COMMAND-TRAC I® OR ROCK-TRAC®)
WARNING!
Failure to engage a position completely can cause
transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle
control. You could have a collision. Do not drive the
vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.
Operating Instructions/Precautions
The transfer case provides four mode positions:
•2H (Two-wheel drive high range)
•4H (Four-wheel drive high range)
•N (Neutral)
•4L (Four-wheel drive low range)
The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H
position for normal street and highway conditions such
as hard-surfaced roads.
Four-Wheel Drive Shift Controls
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
In the event that additional traction is required, the
transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the
front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accom-
plished by simply moving the shift lever to one of these
positions. The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose,
slippery road surfaces only and not intended for normal
driving. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on hard-
surfaced roads will cause increased tire wear and damage
to the driveline components.
The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instrument
cluster) alerts the driver that the vehicle is in four-wheel
drive, and the front and rear driveshafts are locked
together. The light will illuminate when the transfer case
is shifted into the 4H position.
NOTE: Do not attempt to shift when only the front or
rear wheels are spinning. The transfer case is not
equipped with a synchronizer, and the front and rear
driveshaft speeds must be equal for a shift to take place.
Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning
can cause damage to the transfer case.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed will
be approximately three times (four times for Rubicon
models) that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road
speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
cause damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear drive-
shaft from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle
to move regardless of the transmission position. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
Shift Positions
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
4WD system mode position, see the information below:
2H Position
This range is used for normal street and highway driving
on hard-surfaced roads.
4H Position
This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range (4H) provides additional traction for
loose, slippery road surfaces and should not be used on
dry pavement.
The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instrument
cluster) will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted
into the 4H position.
N (Neutral) Position
This range disengages the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain. It is to be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Start-
ing and Operating” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
4L Position
This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range (4L) provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instrument
cluster) will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted
into the 4L position.
NOTE: When in 4WD, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
display in the instrument cluster.
Shifting Procedure
2H to 4H or 4H to 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion,
the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you
momentarily release the accelerator pedal after complet-
ing the shift. Apply a constant force when shifting the
transfer case lever.
4H to 4L or 4L to 4H
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift an
automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or press the
clutch pedal on a manual transmission. While the vehicle is
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer case
lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause with the
transfer case in N (Neutral). Once the shift is completed,
place the automatic transmission into DRIVE or release the
clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may oc-
cur due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned.
Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth align-
ment and shift completion to occur. The preferred
method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L
with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h).
WARNING!
Failure to engage a position completely can cause
transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle
control. You could have a collision. Do not drive the
vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.
TRAC-LOK® REAR AXLE — IF EQUIPPED
The Trac-Lok® rear axle provides a constant driving force
to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by the
loss of traction at one driving wheel. If traction differs
between the two rear wheels, the differential automati-
cally proportions the usable torque by providing more
torque to the wheel that has traction.
Trac-Lok® is especially helpful during slippery driving
conditions. With both rear wheels on a slippery surface, a
slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum
traction.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differen-
tial, never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground. The vehicle may drive through the rear
wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to lose
control of your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
AXLE LOCK (TRU–LOK®) — RUBICON MODELS
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument
panel (to the left of the steering column).
This feature will only activate when the following con-
ditions are met:
•Key in ignition, vehicle in 4L (Low) range.
•Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
To activate the system, press the bottom of the AXLE
LOCK switch once to lock the rear axle only (the “Rear
Axle Lock Indicator Light” will illuminate), press the
bottom of the switch again to lock the front axle (the
“Front Axle Lock Indicator Light” will illuminate). When
the rear axle is locked, pressing the switch again will lock
or unlock the front axle.
NOTE: The indicator lights will flash until the axles are
fully locked or unlocked.
Axle Lock Switch
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
To unlock the axles, press the top of the AXLE LOCK
switch.
Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L
(Low) range, or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF
position.
ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic discon-
necting stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater
front suspension travel in off-road situations.
This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch
located on the instrument panel (to the left of the steering
column).
Press the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system. Press
the switch again to deactivate the system. The “Sway Bar
Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) will
illuminate when the bar is disconnected. The “Sway Bar
Sway Bar Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
Indicator Light” will flash during activation transition, or
when activation conditions are not met. The stabilizer/
sway bar should remain in on-road mode during normal
driving conditions.
WARNING!
Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on
hard-surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph
(29 km/h); you may lose control of the vehicle, which
could result in serious injury. The front stabilizer bar
enhances vehicle stability and is necessary for main-
taining control of the vehicle. The system monitors
vehicle speed and will attempt to reconnect the
stabilizer bar at speeds over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is
indicated by a flashing or solid “Sway Bar Indicator
Light.” Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph
(22 km/h), the system will once again attempt to
return to off-road mode.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4H
or 4L and press the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the
off-road position. Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation”
in “Starting and Operating” for further information. The
“Sway Bar Indicator Light” will flash until the stabilizer/
sway bar has been fully disconnected.
NOTE: The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked
due to left and right suspension height differences. This
condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle
loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to
disconnect/reconnect, the right and left halves of the bar
must be aligned. This alignment may require that the
vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side
to side.
To return to on-road mode, press the SWAY BAR switch
again.
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to on-road
mode, vehicle stability is greatly reduced. Do not
attempt to drive the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h).
Driving faster than 18 mph (29 km/h) may cause loss
of control of the vehicle, which could result in
serious injury. Contact your local authorized dealer
for assistance.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto-
rily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Side Step Removal – If Equipped
NOTE: Prior to off-road usage, the side steps should be
removed to prevent damage.
1. Remove the two nuts from the bodyside.
2. Remove one bolt from the underside of the vehicle.
3. Remove the side step assembly.
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-
road. You should be familiar with the terrain and area
before proceeding. There are many types of surface
conditions: hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,
mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect on
your vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Control-
ling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road
driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel
and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid sudden
accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases, there are no
road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Therefore,
you will need to use your own good judgment on what is
safe and what is not. When on a trail, you should always
be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in
terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route while
remembering what you are currently driving over.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle
exhaust system could cause a fire.
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an
off-road situation.
When To Use 4L (Low) Range
When off-road driving, shift into 4L (Low) for additional
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain,
ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase low
speed pulling power. This range should be limited to
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, steep in-
clines, or sand where additional low speed pulling power
is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h)
should be avoided when in 4L (Low) range.
CAUTION!
Do not use 4L (Low) range when operating the
vehicle on dry pavement. Driveline hardware dam-
age can result.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the simultane-
ous use of the brake and throttle (two-footed driving).
When climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects,
using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the
vehicle from jerking or lurching. This technique is also
used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a
steep incline.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
Snow
In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at
slower speeds, shift the transmission into a low gear and
the transfer case into 4L (Low) if necessary. Do not shift to
a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway. Over-
revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be
lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering
wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth,
while still applying throttle. This will allow the tires to get
a fresh ⬙bite⬙and help maintain your momentum.
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
engine RPM or vehicle speeds, because engine brak-
ing may cause skidding and loss of control.
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
Mud
Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires
and is very difficult to get through. You should use
second gear (manual transmission), or DRIVE (automatic
transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L (Low)
position to maintain your momentum. If you start to slow
to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than a
1/4 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction.
Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage
and getting stuck. They are normally full of debris from
previous vehicles getting stuck. As a good practice before
entering any mud hole, get out and determine how deep
it is, if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle
can be safely recovered if stuck.
Sand
Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire
pressure. When crossing soft, sandy spots in a trail,
maintain your vehicle’s momentum and do not stop. The
key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire
pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneu-
vers and maintaining the vehicle’s momentum. If you are
going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes,
reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi
(103 kPa) to allow for a greater tire surface area. Reduced
tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and
handling while driving on the soft sand, but you must
return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on
pavement or other hard surfaces. Be sure you have a way
to reinflate the tires prior to reducing the pressure.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce your
speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High Points)
While driving off-road, you will encounter many types of
terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different
types of obstacles. Before proceeding, review the path
ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability
to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong.
Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the
vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle
forward until it makes contact with the object. Apply the
throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and
ease the vehicle up and over the object.
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system
loading which could cause you to loose control of
your vehicle.
Using A Spotter
There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle
or determine the correct path. Determining the correct
path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting
many obstacles. In these cases have someone guide you
over, through, or around the obstacle. Have the person
stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see
the obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and
guide you through.
Crossing Large Rocks
When approaching large rocks, choose a path which
ensures you drive over the largest of them with your
tires. This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle.
The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side
wall and is designed to take the abuse. Always look
ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with
your tires.
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
•Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large
enough to strike your axles or undercarriage.
•Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large
enough to contact the door sills.
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or Rut
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large
rut, the angled approach is the key to maintaining your
vehicle’s mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45-
degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle
independently. You need to use caution when crossing
large obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross
any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great
enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get
caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a
45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed
dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created.
You should now be able to drive out following the trench
you just created at a 45-degree angle.
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing
an obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
Crossing Logs
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approxi-
mately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be
on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the
log. While climbing the log, modulate your brake and
accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your
tires. Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter
than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will
become high-centered.
Getting High-Centered
If you get hung up or high-centered on an object, get out of
the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung up
on, where it is contacting the underbody and what is the best
direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are
in contact with, jack the vehicle up and place a few rocks
under the tires so the weight is off of the high point when
you let the vehicle down. You can also try rocking the
vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object.
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects
increases the risk of underbody damage.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under-
standing of your abilities and your vehicle’s limitations.
Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep
to climb and should not be attempted. You should always
feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You
should always climb hills straight up and down. Never
attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
Before Climbing A Steep Hill
As you approach a hill, consider its grade or steepness.
Determine if it is too steep. Look to see what the traction
is on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and down?
What is on top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks,
branches or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong? If every-
thing looks good and you feel confident, shift the trans-
mission into a lower gear with 4L (Low) engaged, and
proceed with caution, maintaining your momentum as
you climb the hill.
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving Up Hill
Once you have determined your ability to proceed and
have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle
up for the straightest possible run. Accelerate with an
easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start
up the hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade; the
abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control. If
the front end begins to bounce, ease off the throttle
slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground. As you
approach the crest of the hill, ease off the throttle and
slowly proceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip as
you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator
and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no
more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth. This will
provide a fresh ⬙bite⬙into the surface and will usually
provide enough traction to complete the climb. If you do
not make it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and
back straight down the grade using engine resistance
along with the vehicle brakes.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn
around on a steep grade. Driving across an incline
increases the risk of a rollover, which may result in
severe injury.
Driving Downhill
Before driving down a steep hill, you need to determine
if it is too steep for a safe descent. What is the surface
traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow,
controlled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a straight
descent? Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill
to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast? If you feel
confident in your ability to proceed, then make sure you
are in 4L (Low) and proceed with caution. Allow engine
braking to control the descent and apply your brakes, if
necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use
vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking.
Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose
control and be seriously injured or killed.
Driving Across An Incline
If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline. If it is
necessary, know your vehicle’s abilities. Driving across an
incline places more weight on the downhill wheels, which
increases the possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover.
Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable
soils. If possible, transverse the incline at an angle heading
slightly up or down.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a
rollover , which may result in severe injury.
If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift
into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing
engine braking to control the descent and apply your
brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt
to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and
rolling the vehicle, which may result in severe injury.
Always back carefully straight down a hill in RE-
VERSE. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using
only the vehicle brakes. Never drive diagonally across
a hill, always drive straight up or down.
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
Water crossings should be avoided, if possible, and only
be attempted when necessary in a safe, responsible
manner. You should only drive through areas which are
designated and approved. You should tread lightly and
avoid damage to the environment. You should know
your vehicle’s abilities and be able to recover it if
something goes wrong. You should never stop or shut a
vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested
water into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls, do
not attempt to restart it. Determine if it has ingested
water first. The key to any crossing is low and slow. Shift
into first gear (manual transmission), or DRIVE (auto-
matic transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L
(Low) position and proceed very slowly with a constant
slow speed {3 to 5 mph (5 to 8 km/h) maximum} and
light throttle. Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to
accelerate through the crossing. After crossing any water
higher than the bottom of the axle differentials, you
should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water
ingestion.
CAUTION!
•Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, trans-
fer case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you
drive too fast or through too deep of water. Water
can cause permanent damage to engine, driveline
or other vehicle components, and your brakes will
be less effective once wet and/or muddy.
•This vehicle is capable of crossing through water at
a depth of 30 inches (76 cm) at speeds no greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h). Water ingestion can occur
causing damage to your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
Before You Cross Any Type Of Water
As you approach any type of water, you need to determine
if you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get out
and walk through the water or probe it with a stick. You
need to be sure of its depth, approach angle, current and
bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy waters;
check for hidden obstacles. Make sure you will not be
intruding on any wildlife, and you can recover the vehicle if
necessary. The key to a safe crossing is the water depth,
current and bottom conditions. On soft bottoms, the vehicle
will sink in, effectively increasing the water level on the
vehicle. Be sure to consider this when determining the depth
and the ability to safely cross.
Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other
Standing Water
Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water areas nor-
mally contain murky or muddy waters. These water types
normally contain hidden obstacles and make it difficult to
determine an accurate water depth, approach angle, and
bottom condition. Murky or muddy water holes are where
you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering. This
makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery. If you
are able to determine you can safely cross, than proceed
using the low and slow method.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec-
tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or
Other Flowing Water
Flowing water can be extremely dangerous. Never attempt
to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow water.
Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle down-
stream, sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow
water, a high current can still wash the dirt out from around
your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy. There is
still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with
slower water currents in depths greater than the vehicle’s
running ground clearance. You should never attempt to
cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle’s
running ground clearance. Even the slowest current can
push the heaviest vehicle downstream and out of control if
the water is deep enough to push on the large surface area of
the vehicle’s body. Before you proceed, determine the speed
of the current, the water’s depth, approach angle, bottom
condition and if there are any obstacles. Then cross at an
angle heading slightly upstream using the low and slow
technique.
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can
push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of
control. This could put you and your passengers at
risk of injury or drowning.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
your vehicle ready when you need it.
•Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
•Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
•Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
•Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
•After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
•If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
•Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
•Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of
the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid
temperature and it should be avoided when possible.
Damage to the power steering pump may occur.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an
automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission
in REVERSE or first gear.
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
•When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
•
This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
Parking Brake
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
•Never use the PARK position on an automatic
transmission as a substitute for the parking brake.
Always apply the parking brake fully when parked
to guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
•When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
•Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
•Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
•Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic trans-
mission in PARK, a manual transmission in RE-
VERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may cause the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the
driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
WARNING!
Significant over or under-inflation of tires, or mixing
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss
of braking effectiveness.
The Anti-Lock Brake System conducts a low speed self-
test at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If for any reason your
foot is on the brake when the vehicle reaches 12 mph
(20 km/h), this check will be delayed until 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Anti-Lock Brake System pump motor runs during
the self-test, and during an ABS stop, to provide the
regulated hydraulic pressure. The motor pump makes a
low humming noise during operation; this is normal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
WARNING!
•Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
•The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can they increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
•The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
•The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
CAUTION!
The Anti-Lock Brake System is subject to possible
detrimental effects of electronic interference caused
by improperly installed aftermarket radios or tele-
phones.
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing sen-
sation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard. This
is normal, indicating that the Anti-Lock Brake System is
functioning.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist
System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Sway Control (TSC), and Hill Descent Control
(HDC). All of these systems work together to enhance
vehicle stability and control in various driving condi-
tions, and are commonly referred to as ESC.
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the ve-
hicle, nor can they increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. The ABS cannot prevent
collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) to provide
enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS
system functions similar to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if
TCS and ESC are in either the “Partial Off” or “Full Off”
modes. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in
this section for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. The BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
WARNING!
If the clutch pedal (manual transmission only) re-
mains pressed during the application of the throttle,
the HSA will disengage allowing the vehicle to roll
down the incline. This could cause a collision with
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
another vehicle or object. To avoid this, do not apply
throttle while pressing the clutch pedal until you are
ready to release the clutch. Always remember the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
•Vehicle must be stopped
•Vehicle must be on an 8% or greater incline (3% for
manual transmission equipped vehicles)
•Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer
where the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, which could cause a collision with an-
other vehicle or object. Always remember the driver
is responsible for braking the vehicle.
The system will only work if the intended direction of the
vehicle and vehicle gear match. For example, if the
intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is
in DRIVE (automatic transmission equipped vehicle),
and the activation criteria are met, HSA will activate.
HSA On Automatic Transmission Vehicles
The system will work in REVERSE, and all forward gears
on vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission.
The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in
NEUTRAL.
HSA On Manual Transmission Vehicles
The system will work in REVERSE, forward gears, and
NEUTRAL on manual transmission equipped vehicles.
The system does not recognize NEUTRAL on manual
vehicles, thus it will hold the vehicle on an incline for a
short period while in NEUTRAL, regardless of clutch
position. To prevent this, do not attempt to roll down a
hill simply by putting the transmission in NEUTRAL and
letting gravity act on the vehicle, as the HSA will prevent
the vehicle from rolling. Instead, use the appropriate gear
for moving in the desired direction.
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing With HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
WARNING!
•If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas-
ing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
•Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
NOTE: The HSA system may also be turned on and off if
the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, follow this
procedure:
1.
Start with the engine off and vehicle in PARK (automatic
transmission) or NEUTRAL with clutch out (manual
transmission) with wheels straight. Apply parking brake
on manual transmission vehicle.
2. Start the engine.
3. With the engine running, the brake applied, and the
clutch out, rotate the steering wheel 180° counterclock-
wise from center.
4. Press the ESC OFF switch four times within
twenty seconds.
5. Rotate the steering wheel 360° clockwise (180° clock-
wise from center).
6. Cycle ignition switch OFF then ON.
7. If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will blink
several times to confirm HSA is off.
Steps 1-7 must be completed within 90 seconds to turn off
HSA. Repeat steps 1-7 to re-enable HSA functionality.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change
of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient
to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies the appropriate
brake and may reduce engine power to lessen the chance
that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only intervene during
very severe or evasive driving maneuvers.
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) can only reduce the
chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors such as road conditions, leaving the road-
way or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE: Anytime the ESC system is in the “Full Off”
mode, ERM is disabled. Refer to Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) for a complete explanation of the available
ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM) cannot prevent all wheel lift or
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC
corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by apply-
ing the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
the desired path.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
•Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located
in the instrument cluster), starts to flash as soon as the tires
lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when
TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road condi-
tions.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa-
bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ESC system has three available operating modes in
4H range. The system has one operating mode in 4L
range. Two-wheel drive vehicles and four-wheel drive
vehicles in 2H range have two operating modes.
4H Range (4WD Models)
On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4H range.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC
OFF switch.
ESC Off
This mode is entered by pressing and holding momen-
tarily pressing the ESC OFF switch for 5 seconds.
When in ⬙Partial Off⬙mode, the TCS portion of ESC has
been disabled and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
ESC OFF Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
All other stability features of ESC function normally. This
mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep
snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more wheel spin
than ESC would normally allow is required to gain
traction. To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the
ESC OFF switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On”
mode of operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the ESC OFF switch. Once the situation
requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode is
overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the
ESC OFF switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in
motion.
When in ESC Off mode, ESC and TCS, except for the
“limited slip” feature described in the TCS section, are
turned off. To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the
ESC OFF switch. This will restore normal “ESC On”
mode of operation.
WARNING!
With the ESC in ⴖFull Offⴖmode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features offered by ESC and
ERM are disabled. In an emergency evasive maneu-
ver, the ESC and ERM systems will not engage to
assist in maintaining stability. The “Full Off” ESC
mode is intended for off-road use only.
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
4L Range (4WD Models)
ESC Off
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4L range.
Whenever the vehicle is started in 4L range, or the transfer
case (if equipped) is shifted from 4H range or NEUTRAL to
4L range, the ESC system will be in this mode. In 4L range,
ESC and TCS, except for the “limited slip” feature described
in the TCS section, are turned off until the vehicle reaches a
speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At 40 mph (64 km/h), the
normal ESC stability function returns but TCS remains off.
When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph (56 km/h), the
ESC system shuts off. The ESC is off at low vehicle speeds in
4L range so that it will not interfere with off-road driving,
but the ESC function returns to provide the stability feature
at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h). The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will always be illuminated in
4L range when ESC is off.
NOTE: The “ESC OFF” message will display and the
audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed in
the PARK position from any position other than PARK,
and then moved out of the PARK position. This will
occur even if the message was previously cleared.
WARNING!
With the ESC switched off in 4L, the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by ESC and ERM are un-
available.
2H Range (4WD Models) Or 2WD Models
On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 2H range
and on 2WD vehicles.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
Partial Off
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of ESC has
been disabled and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
All other stability features of ESC function normally. This
mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep
snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more wheel spin
than ESC would normally allow is required to gain
traction. To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the
ESC OFF switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On”
mode of operation.
NOTE:
To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with
snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it
may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off” mode by
pressing the ESC OFF switch. Once the situation requiring
ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode is overcome,
turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the ESC OFF
switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
•Each time the ignition is cycled ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was cycled off previously.
•The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially off
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-
sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro-
priate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
will become active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is re-
quired. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the tongue weight recommendations. Refer to
“Trailer Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the
engine power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to
stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the
ESP system is in the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) – If Equipped
HDC is only intended for low speed off-road driving.
HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills in
off-road driving conditions by applying the brakes when
necessary.
The symbol indicates the status of the Hill
Descent Control (HDC) feature. The lamp will
be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only
be armed when the transfer case is in the “4WD
LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph
(48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while attempt-
ing to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will
flash on/off.
When enabled, HDC senses the terrain and activates
when the vehicle is descending a hill. HDC speed may be
adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions. The
speed corresponds to the transmission gear selected.
Gear Approximate HDC
Set Speed
1st 1 mph (1.5 km/h)
2nd 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
3rd 4 mph (6.5 km/h)
4th 5.5 mph (9 km/h)
DRIVE 7.5 mph (12 km/h)
REVERSE 1 mph (1.5 km/h)
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
However, the driver can override HDC operation by
applying the brake to slow the vehicle down below the
HDC control speed. If more speed is desired during HDC
control, the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed
in the usual manner. When either the brake or the
accelerator is released, HDC will control the vehicle at the
original set speed.
Enabling HDC
1. Shift the transfer case into 4WD LOW range. Refer to
“Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and Oper-
ating” for further information.
2. Press the “Hill Descent” button. The “Hill Descent
Control Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will
turn on solid.
NOTE: If the transfer case is not in 4WD LOW range, the
“Hill Descent Control Indicator Light” will flash for
five seconds and HDC will not be enabled.
Disabling HDC
Press the “Hill Descent” button or shift the transfer case
out of 4WD LOW range. The “Hill Descent Control
Indicator” light in the instrument cluster will turn off.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation
5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
•Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: T145/80D18 103M.
•High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ= Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
TorS= Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
EXAMPLE:
R= Construction code
—⬙R⬙means radial construction
—⬙D⬙means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H= Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ= Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind
the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle
has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is
measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire
inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded
into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
Tire Placard Location (Two-Door Model)
Tire Placard Location (Four-Door Model)
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750
= 650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
•The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
•Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
•Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
•Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
•Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
WARNING! (Continued)
•Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
•Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear pat-
terns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear
patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier
tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic
and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Inflation Pressures
Tire pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage, at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire side wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
buildup or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
•The tire has not been driven on when flat,
•The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable) and
•The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙(6 mm)
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Code).
All Season Tires – If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. Summer tires will not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to
do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
WARNING! (Continued)
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
(Continued)
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to
replacement tires in this section for further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
•Driving style
•Tire pressure
•Distance driven
•Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
WARNING!
•Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
•Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
•Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
•Install on Rear Tires Only.
•P225/75R16 or a P235/65R17 tire with the use of a
traction device that meets the SAE type “Class S”
specification is recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
•Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
•Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
•Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
•Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
•Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
•Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles de-
pends on tires of equal size, type and circumference
on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause
damage to the transfer case. Tire rotation schedule
should be followed to balance tire wear.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three-hour period. Refer to “Tires – General Informa-
tion” in “Starting and Operating” for information on
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven; this is
normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light” has been illuminated, the tire pressure
must be increased to the recommended cold placard
pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” to be turned OFF. The system will auto-
matically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will extinguish once the updated tire
pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information.
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) air pressure of
35 psi (241 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
30 psi (207 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF only
after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s recom-
mended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
•The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. The TPMS pressures
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sen-
sor damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam-
age. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance
beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as
damage to the sensors may result.
•After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
NOTE:
•The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, nor to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
•The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.”
•Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Premium and Base TPM System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
•Receiver Module
•Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare
wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size
spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full size
spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road
tires. A low spare tire will not cause the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to illuminate or the chime to
sound.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, , a “LOW
TIRE PRESSURE” message will display in the
EVIC, and an audible chime will be activated when one
or more of the four active road tire pressures are low.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value. The system will automatically
update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been
received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds, and will remain on solid when
a system fault is detected. The system fault will also
sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. A
system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios:
Base Tire Pressure Monitoring
Vehicles not equipped with EVIC will inform the driver
which tire(s) are low but not provide actual tire pressure.
The low tire ISO telltale will illuminate along with “LoTIrE”
message displayed in the ODO and then it will scroll to
which tire location is lower than the Placard Value.
Tire location will be displayed as follows:
LF=Left Front
rF=right Front
Lr=Left rear
rr=right rear
Premium Tire Pressure Monitoring
Vehicles equipped with a EVIC will display specific tire
pressure information. When tire pressure is low the low
tire ISO telltale will illuminate and the EVIC will display
actual individual tire pressure when the tire pressure is
lower than the Placard Value.
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure
monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In the event that
the matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low
pressure road tire, the next ignition key cycle will still
show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to
be ON, and a chime to sound. Driving the vehicle for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) will turn
OFF the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” as
long as none of the road tires are below the low
pressure warning threshold.
•If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching
full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it does not
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire.
The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure.
If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound
and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn ON. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. For each subsequent ignition
key cycle, a chime will sound and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. Once you repair
or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the
vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will update
automatically and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-
tale Light” will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
Premium System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
•Receiver Module
•Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
•Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare
wheel, if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full-size spare
tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an au-
dible chime will be activated, when one or more of
the four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
EVIC will display a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message for
a minimum of five seconds, an “Inflate to XX” message
and a graphic display of the pressure value(s) with the
low tire(s) “flashing.” Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is “flashing” on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
inflation value shown in the “Inflate to XX” message. The
system will automatically update, the graphic display of
the pressure value(s) will stop “flashing,” and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once
the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime.
The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” mes-
sage for a minimum of five seconds. This message is then
followed by a graphic display, with “- -“ in place of the
pressure value(s), indicating which Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Sensor(s) is not being received.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault is detected possibly related to an incorrect sensor
location fault. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
message is then followed by a graphic display, with
pressure values still shown. This indicates the pressure
values are still being received from the TPM Sensors but
they may not be located in the correct vehicle position.
However, the system still needs to be serviced as long as
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙message exists.
NOTE:
•
If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure
monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In the event that
the matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low
pressure road tire, the next ignition switch cycle will still
show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to be
ON, a chime to sound, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE”
message to appear in the EVIC, and the graphic display
will still show the low tire pressure value “flashing.”
Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) will turn OFF the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” as long as none of road tires are below the
low pressure warning threshold.
•If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching
full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it does not
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire.
The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure.
If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain ON, a chime
will sound, and the EVIC will still display a “flashing”
pressure value in the graphic display. After driving the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h),
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM⬙message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM⬙message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the
TPMS will update automatically.
In addition, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•This device may not cause harmful interference.
•This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States MRXC4W4MA4
Canada 2546A-C4W4MA4
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline
having an octane rating of 87. The use of
premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci-
fications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability prob-
lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi-
nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•operate in a lean mode
•OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
•poor engine performance
•poor cold start and cold drivability
•increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
•drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
•change the engine oil and oil filter
•disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain
effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents
or other additives is not needed under normal conditions
and they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you
should not have to add anything to the fuel.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
•An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation sys-
tem to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
•Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is the correct one for this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Cap
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
CAUTION!
•Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impu-
rities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
•To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
•Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the MIL to turn on.
•A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
•When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
•Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one
click. This is an indication that the cap is properly
tightened.
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
•If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose,
improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a
malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the
odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙
sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to
turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message
will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This
might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected
twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL off.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weigh-
ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tempo-
rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙condition. The recommended way to measure
GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the
scale.
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further infor-
mation.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be
more than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
Trailer Sway Control – If Equipped
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer
tongue. It typically provides adjustable friction associ-
ated with the telescoping motion to dampen any un-
wanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration / loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
•
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy
Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Transmission Axle Model
GCWR
(Gross
Combined
Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
3.6L/Manual 3.21 Two–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
6,296 lbs
(2 856 kg)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs
(91 kg)
3.6L/Manual 3.73 Two–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
6,296 lbs
(2 856 kg)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs
(91 kg)
3.6L/
Automatic
3.21 Two–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
6,309 lbs
(2 862 kg)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs
(91 kg)
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
Engine/
Transmission Axle Model
GCWR
(Gross
Combined
Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
3.6L/
Automatic
3.73 Two–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
6,309 lbs
(2 862 kg)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs
(91 kg)
3.6L/Manual 3.21 Two–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
6,355 lbs
(2 883 kg)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs
(91 kg)
3.6L/Manual 3.73 Two–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
6,355 lbs
(2 883 kg)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs
(91 kg)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
Engine/
Transmission Axle Model
GCWR
(Gross
Combined
Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
3.6L/
Automatic
3.21 Two–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
6,368 lbs
(2 888 kg)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs
(91 kg)
3.6L/
Automatic
3.73 Two–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
6,368 lbs
(2 888 kg)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs
(91 kg)
3.6L/Manual 4.10 2–Door
Rubicon
Model
(4WD)
6,445 lbs
(2 923 kg)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs
(91 kg)
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
Engine/
Transmission Axle Model
GCWR
(Gross
Combined
Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
3.6L/
Automatic
3.73 Two–Door
Rubicon
Model
(4WD)
6,458 lbs
(2 929 kg)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs
(91 kg)
3.6L/
Automatic
4.10 Two–Door
Rubicon
Model
(4WD)
6,458 lbs
(2 929 kg)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs
(91 kg)
3.6L/Manual 3.21 Four–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
6,552 lbs
(2 972 kg)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs
(91 kg)
3.6L/Manual 3.73 Four–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
8,052 lbs
(3 652 kg)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs
(159 kg)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
Engine/
Transmission Axle Model
GCWR
(Gross
Combined
Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
3.6L/
Automatic
3.21 Four–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
6,566 lbs
(2 978 kg)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs
(91 kg)
3.6L/
Automatic
3.73 Four–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
8,066 lbs
(3 659 kg)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs
(159 kg)
3.6L/Manual 3.21 Four–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
6,768 lbs
(3 070 kg)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs
(91 kg)
3.6L/Manual 3.73 Four–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
8,268 lbs
(3 750 kg)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs
(159 kg)
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
Engine/
Transmission Axle Model
GCWR
(Gross
Combined
Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
3.6L/
Automatic
3.21 Four–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
6,782 lbs
(3 076 kg)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs
(91 kg)
3.6L/
Automatic
3.73 Four–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
8,282 lbs
(3 757 kg)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs
(159 kg)
3.6L/Manual 4.10 Four–Door
Rubicon
Model
(4WD)
8,334 lbs
(3 780 kg)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs
(159 kg)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
Engine/
Transmission Axle Model
GCWR
(Gross
Combined
Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
3.6L/
Automatic
4.10 Four–Door
Rubicon
Model
(4WD)
8,347 lbs
(3 786 kg)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs
(159 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo (ie.
the GVWR), and the GVWR should never exceed the
weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information
placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•The tongue weight of the trailer.
•The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
NOTE: Trailer towing requires special rear axle lubri-
cant. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for the correct fluid type.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
CAUTION!
•Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
•Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
•Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
•When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-
age to the brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steer-
ing, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
(Continued)
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
•Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. With a manual transmis-
sion, shift the transmission into first gear. And
with four-wheel-drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N). Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖthe trailer wheels.
•GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-
lized.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
Towing Requirements – Tires
– Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
– Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
– Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper
inspection procedure.
– When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
•Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
•An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
•Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
•Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package will include a four–pin wiring
harness. Use a factory-approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustration.
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. How-
ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, use
the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control to select a
lower gear range.
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, then change the trans-
mission fluid and filter as specified for ⬙police, taxi, fleet,
or frequent trailer towing.⬙Refer to the “Maintenance
Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
•Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
•When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
•Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 539
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE See Instructions
•
Automatic transmission in PARK
•
Manual transmission in gear
(NOT in NEUTRAL [N])
•
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
•
Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
540 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing – Four-Wheel Drive Models
NOTE: The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL
(N), automatic transmission must be shifted into PARK,
and manual transmission must be placed in gear (NOT in
NEUTRAL) for recreational towing.
CAUTION!
•Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used. Inter-
nal damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
recreational towing.
•Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
•Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK
for recreational towing.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (not
in Neutral) for recreational towing.
•Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL
(N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
•Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper tow-
ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
•Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 541
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear drive-
shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to move, even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the
transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before recre-
ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or
depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
4. Turn the engine OFF.
5. Shift the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL (N).
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
542 STARTING AND OPERATING
8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual
transmissions) for five seconds and ensure that there is
no vehicle movement.
9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 with automatic transmission in
DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear.
10. Turn the engine OFF.
11. Firmly apply the parking brake.
12. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual
transmission in gear (NOT in Neutral).
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-
mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine
is OFF before shifting the transmission into PARK.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 543
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con-
nected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
5. Press and hold the brake pedal.
6. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
7. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired position.
NOTE: When shifting the transfer case out of NEUTRAL
(N), turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid
gear clash.
8. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or place
manual transmission in Neutral.
9. Release the brake pedal.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake
pedal (and clutch pedal on manual transmissions),
and check that the vehicle operates normally.
544 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........546
䡵IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............546
䡵JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..........547
▫Jack Location ........................548
▫Spare Tire Stowage ....................549
▫Preparations For Jacking ................549
▫Jacking Instructions ...................550
▫Road Tire Installation ...................554
䡵JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES............555
▫Preparations For Jump-Start ..............556
▫Jump-Starting Procedure ................558
䡵FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE..............559
䡵EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED . .561
䡵SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE ................562
䡵TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........563
▫Without The Ignition Key ................564
▫Four–Wheel Drive Models ...............565
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
•On the highways — slow down.
•In city traffic — while stopped, shift transmission into
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
546 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
•If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
•Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 547
WARNING! (Continued)
•The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear storage
compartment.
NOTE: Turn the black plastic wing nut counter clock-
wise to loosen the jack from the storage bin.
Jack Storage
548 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Stowage
To remove the spare tire from the carrier, remove the tire
cover, if equipped, and remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench turning them counterclockwise.
NOTE:
If you have added aftermarket accessories to the
spare tire mounted carrier, it cannot exceed a gross weight
of 69 lbs (31.3 kg) including the weight of the spare tire.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
Jack Wing Nut 6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 549
4. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or a
manual transmission into REVERSE.
5. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite of the jack-
ing position. For example, if changing
the right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
•Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
•Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
•Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
•Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
550 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing out.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from the stored
location.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground.
Jack Warning Label
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 551
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect the jack
handle driver to the extension, then to the lug wrench.
4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of the
vehicle. Place the jack under the axle tube, as shown.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
fully engaged.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right.
Raise the vehicle till the tire is raised from the surface
of the road. Minimum tire lift provides maximum
stability.
Rear Jacking Location
Front Jacking Location
552 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable and cause a collision. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts clockwise.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Lug Nut Installation 6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 553
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left,
and remove the jack.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alter-
nate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The
correct wheel nut tightness is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m). If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at
a service station.
10. Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks.
11. Secure the tire, jack, and tools in their proper loca-
tions.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop, could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.
554 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4.
Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench
while at the end of the handle for increased leverage.
Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has
been tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug
nut is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m). If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
your authorized dealer or service station.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 555
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the right rear of
the engine compartment, behind the Power Distribution
Center.
Positive Battery Post
556 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
•Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
•Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
•Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and
turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 557
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-
sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-
plosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
558 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+)end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use
(i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd gear and
REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently press-
ing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without
spinning the wheels, or racing the engine.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 559
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC
Off⬙switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙mode.
CAUTION!
•When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive-
train damage may result.
•Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
560 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they are
mounted in the front and the rear.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle. Always use an appropriately rated
tow strap.
WARNING!
•Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
•Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, caus-
ing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle. Tow straps are recommended
when towing the vehicle, chains may cause vehicle
damage.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 561
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
shift lever override access cover (located to the right of
the shift lever).
4. Turn the ignition to the ACC or ON/RUN position,
but do not start the engine. 5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
6.
Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access port,
and push and hold the override release lever down.
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
562 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
7. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
9. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. If the trans-
mission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles
may also be towed as described under “Recreational
Towing” in the “Starting And Operating” section.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground 4WD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE See instructions under “Recreational Towing”
•Automatic Transmission in PARK
•
Manual Transmission in gear ( NOT in Neutral)
•Transfer Case in NEUTRAL
•Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 563
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to “Shift Lever
Override” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for instruc-
tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK
for towing.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the OFF position. The only approved
method of towing without the ignition key is with a
flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
564 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Four–Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case
is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the forward
direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF the
transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is
in PARK (for automatic transmissions) or in gear ( NOT
in NEUTRAL, for manual transmissions). Refer to “Rec-
reational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for de-
tailed instructions.
CAUTION!
•Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
•Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper tow-
ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 565
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L ..........569
䡵ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .570
▫Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............570
䡵EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS .............571
䡵REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................572
䡵DEALER SERVICE ......................573
䡵MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........573
▫Engine Oil ..........................574
▫Engine Oil Filter ......................576
▫Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................577
▫Maintenance-Free Battery ...............577
▫Air Conditioner Maintenance .............579
▫Body Lubrication .....................582
▫Windshield Wiper Blades ...............583
▫Adding Washer Fluid ..................583
▫Exhaust System ......................584
▫Cooling System ......................586
▫Brake System ........................592
▫Automatic Transmission – If Equipped ......594
7
▫Clutch Hydraulic System (Manual
Transmission) – If Equipped ..............597
▫Manual Transmission – If Equipped ........597
▫Transfer Case ........................598
▫Front/Rear Axle Fluid ..................599
▫Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................600
䡵FUSES ..............................607
▫Totally Integrated Power Module ..........607
䡵VEHICLE STORAGE ....................613
䡵REPLACEMENT BULBS .................614
䡵BULB REPLACEMENT ..................615
▫Headlamp ..........................615
▫Front Park/Turn Signal .................616
▫Front Side Marker .....................616
▫Front Fog Lamp ......................616
▫Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And
Backup Lamp ........................617
▫Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .617
䡵FLUID CAPACITIES ....................618
䡵FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND
GENUINE PARTS ......................619
▫Engine .............................619
▫Chassis .............................620
568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Battery 8 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Air Cleaner Filter
4 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (Under Engine Cover) 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Engine Oil Fill 11 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
•If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improp-
erly installed, or damaged. A “gASCAP” message will be
displayed in the odometer. Tighten the gas cap until a
⬙clicking⬙sound is heard. This is an indication that the
570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer reset
button to turn the message off. If the problem persists,
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is
started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the prob-
lem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the
MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
3. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
of a normal bulb check.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
•The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
•The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainte-
nance and repairs will not be covered by the manufac-
turer’s warranty.
572 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
•Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 573
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The
engine oil level should be checked five minutes after a
warmed up engine has been shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding 1 U.S. Quart (0.95L) of oil when the
reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a
reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE:Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Pe-
troleum Institute (API). The manu-
facturer only recommends API Cer-
tified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 575
Engine Oil Viscosity – 3.6L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-
partment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to Fiat 9.55535-S1
or Fiat 9.55535-S3 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine
oil meeting MS- 6395 is not available.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577
WARNING!
•Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
•Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
•It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
•Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
•The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to re-
place the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
lower the door.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the two
air filter access doors to the HVAC housing.
5. Open the two air filter access doors.
6. Remove the two particulate air filters from the HVAC
air inlet housing. Pull the filter elements straight out of
the housing, one at a time.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 581
7. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
8. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy opera-
tion and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
nents to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer (if equipped) is shared. The fluid
reservoir is located in the engine compartment. Be sure to
check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator anti-
freeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and
wipe clean the wiper blades; this will help blade perfor-
mance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583
WARNING!
Commercial windshield washer solvents are flammable.
They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised
when filling or working around the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
•Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
•A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
•Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
•Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser (if
equipped) or radiator for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C con-
denser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, clean and flush with OAT coolant
(antifreeze) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technol-
ogy (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “glob-
ally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT
engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, it should be flushed
with OAT coolant and replaced with the specified
OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
•This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To pre-
vent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of
your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-
dard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
•We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
•Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concen-
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
•Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not
recommended and can result in cooling system damage.
Drain, flush, and refill as soon as possible to avoid
damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pres-
sure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
•Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine idling, and warm to normal operating tempera-
ture, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the
bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing en-
gine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
•
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591
•If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
•Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Power Disc Brakes
Disc brakes do not require adjustment; however, several
hard stops during the break-in period are recommended
to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material.
592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinders should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced. If necessary, add fluid
to bring level to the full level mark on the side of the
reservoir of the brake master cylinder. With disc brakes,
fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
If the brake fluid level is abnormally low, check system
for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
damage your brake system and/or impair its perfor-
mance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
•To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593
WARNING! (Continued)
•Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
•Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
this section for fluid specifications. It is important to
maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using
the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid speci-
fications.
594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
It is best to check the fluid level when the transmission is
at normal operating temperature (approximately 180° F
(82° C). This occurs after at least 15 miles (25 km) of
driving. At normal operating temperature, the fluid
cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips.
Use the following procedure to check the transmission
fluid level properly:
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Run the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
3. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
pedal.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi-
tion (allowing time for the transmission to fully en-
gage in each position), ending with the shift lever in
PARK.
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there
is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.
The fluid level should be between the HOT (upper)
reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating
temperature. If the fluid level is low, add fluid through
the dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not
overfill. After adding any quantity of oil through the
dipstick tube, wait a minimum of two minutes for the
oil to fully drain into the transmission before recheck-
ing the fluid level.
NOTE:
•The holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if the
actual level is at or above the hole.
•If it is necessary to check the transmission below the
operating temperature, the fluid level should be be-
tween the two COLD (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at approximately 80° F (27° C). If the
fluid level is correctly established at 80° F (27° C), it
should be between the HOT (upper) reference holes
when the transmission reaches 180° F (82° C). Remem-
ber it is best to check the level at the normal operating
temperature.
596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
If the fluid temperature is below 50° F (10° C), it may
not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid until
the temperature is elevated enough to produce an
accurate reading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK, to
warm the fluid.
7. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.
NOTE: To prevent dirt and water from entering the
transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make
sure that the dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is
normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from
its fully seated position, as long as its seal remains
engaged in the dipstick tube.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transmission
is disassembled for any reason.
Clutch Hydraulic System (Manual Transmission) –
If Equipped
The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated
volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder
reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only the
manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Flu-
ids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer’s recommended manual transmis-
sion fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 in (4.76 mm) below the bottom
of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. If the fluid becomes contaminated with
water, it should be changed immediately. Otherwise,
change the fluid as recommended in the Maintenance
Schedule. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill
hole (A) when the vehicle is in a level position.
598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Fluid
Fluid should be added only at filler hole until fluid
begins to run out of the hole.
Drain
First remove the fill plug (B), then the drain plug (C). The
recommended tightening torque for the drain and fill
plugs is 15 to 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
CAUTION!
When replacing the plugs, do not overtighten them.
You could damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Fluid Level Check
Lubricant should be at the bottom edge of the oil fill hole.
Adding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level
specified above.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
•Stone and gravel impact.
•Insects, tree sap and tar.
•Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Washing
•Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
•If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
•Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that
may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
•Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
•If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
•If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
•If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
•If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
•All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
•To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-
tective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR® Total Clean or equiva-
lent , then MOPAR® Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent to
clean vinyl upholstery.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable and, if used in
closed areas, they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve-
hicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-
type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window
equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models
CAUTION!
To maintain the appearance of your vehicle’s interior
trim and top, follow these precautions:
•Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top
down, as exposure to sun or rain may damage interior
trim.
•Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on top
material, as damage may result.
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry
on the paint, leaving a streak.
•After cleaning your vehicle’s fabric top, always make
sure it is completely dry before lowering.
•Be especially careful when washing the windows by
following the directions for “Care of Fabric Top
Windows.”
WASHING — Use MOPAR® Car Wash or equivalent, or
mild soap suds, lukewarm water, and a brush with soft
bristles. If extra cleaning is required, use MOPAR®
Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or equivalent, or a mild
foaming cleaner on the entire top, but support the top
from underneath.
RINSING — Be sure to remove all traces of cleaner by
rinsing the top thoroughly with clean water. Remember
to allow the top to dry before lowering it.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
•Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can dam-
age the top material. Also, increased water pressure
may force past the weather strips.
•It is recommended that the top be free of water
prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a
door or lowering a window while the top is wet
may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
•Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
•Careless handling and storage of the removable
roof panels may damage the seals, causing water to
leak into the vehicle’s interior.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605
CAUTION! (Continued)
•The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
Care Of Fabric Top Windows
CAUTION!
Your vehicle’s fabric top has pliable plastic windows
which can be scratched unless special care is taken by
following these directions:
1. Never use a dry cloth to remove dust. Instead, use a
microfiber towel or soft cotton cloth moistened with
cold or warm, clean water, and wipe across the
window, not up and down. MOPAR® Jeep Soft Glass
Window Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all
plastic windows without scratching. It removes fine
scratches to improve visibility and provides UV pro-
tection to help prevent yellowing.
2. When washing, never use hot water or anything
stronger than a mild soap. Never use solvents such as
alcohol or harsh cleaning agents.
3. Always rinse thoroughly with cold water, then wipe
with a soft and slightly moist, clean cloth.
4. When removing frost, snow or ice, never use a scraper
or de-icing chemicals. Use warm water only if you
must clean the window quickly.
5. Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from off-road
driving will have a major impact on zipper operation.
Even normal on-road driving and vehicle washing
will eventually impact window zipper operation.
606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To maintain ease of use of the window zippers, each
window zipper should be cleaned and lubricated
regularly. Use MOPAR® Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and
Lubricant or equivalent to ease zipper operation.
Before applying, make sure the zipper teeth are clear
of sand, mud, and other materials. Clean both sides of
the zipper, not just one side. Rinse both zipper halves
with fresh water and allow to dry. Aggressively work
the MOPAR® Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant
or equivalent into the zipper teeth. If a stuck zipper
slide is experienced, work the MOPAR® Soft Top
Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent into the
zipper slide. Several applications may be required
before the zipper comes free.
6. Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any tape to the
windows. Adhesives are hard to remove and may
damage the windows.
FUSES
Totally Integrated Power Module
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center contains
cartridge fuses, mini fuses and relays. A label that identifies
each component is printed on the inside of the cover.
Totally Integrated Power Module
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
J1 — —
J2 30 Amp Pink Transfer Case Module
J3 — —
J4 25 Amp Natural Driver Door Node
J5 25 Amp Natural Passenger Door Node
J6 40 Amp Green Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Pump/Stability
Control System
J7 30 Amp Pink Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Valve/Stability
Control System
J8 — —
J9 40 Amp Green PZEV Sec Motor/Flex Fuel
J10 30 Amp Pink Headlamp Wash Relay/Manifold Tuning Valve
J11 30 Amp Pink Sway Bar
J12 30 Amp Pink Rear Blower Motor/Radiator Fan
J13 60 Amp Yellow Ignition Off Draw (IOD) – Main
608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
J14 40 Amp Green Rear Defroster
J15 40 Amp Green Front Blower
J17 40 Amp Green Starter Solenoid
J18 20 Amp Blue Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Trans Range
J19 60 Amp Yellow Radiator Fan
J20 30 Amp Pink Front Wiper LO/HI
J21 20 Amp Blue Front/Rear Washer
J22 — Spare
M1 15 Amp Blue Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)/Switch
Stop Lamp Feed
M2 20 Amp Yellow Relay Trailer Lighting (Stoplamp)
M3 20 Amp Yellow Frt/Rear Axle Locker Relay
M4 — —
M5 25 Amp Natural Power Inverter – If Equipped
M6 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet #1/Rain Sensor
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
M7 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet #2 (BATT/ACC SELECT)
M8 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seat
M9 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seat – If Equipped
M10 15 Amp Blue Ignition Off Draw – Vehicle Entertainment System,
Satellite Digital Audio Receiver (SDARS), DVD,
Hands-Free Module, RADIO, Antenna, Universal
Garage Door Opener, Vanity Lamp
M11 10 Amp Red (Ignition Off Draw) Climate Control System,
Underhood Lamp
M12 30 Amp Green Amplifier
M13 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Off Draw – Cabin Compartment Node,
Wireless Control Module, SIREN, Multifunction
Control Switch
M14 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow (Export Only)
610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
M15 20 Amp Yellow Climate Control System, Rear View Mirror, Cabin
Compartment Node, Transfer Case Switch, Multi-
Function Control Switch, Tire Pressure Monitor,
Glow Plug Module – Export Diesel Only
M16 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
M17 15 Amp Blue Left Tail/License/Park Lamp
M18 15 Amp Blue Right Tail/Park/Run Lamp
M19 25 Amp Natural Auto Shut Down (ASD #1 and #2)
M20 15 Amp Blue Cabin Compartment Node Interior Light, Switch
Bank
M21 20 Amp Yellow Auto Shut Down (ASD #3)
M22 10 Amp Red Right Horn (HI/LOW)
M23 10 Amp Red Left Horn (HI/LOW)
M24 25 Amp Natural Rear Wiper
M25 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump, Diesel Lift Pump – Export Only
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
M26 10 Amp Red Power Window Switch, Driver Window Switch
M27 10 Amp Red Ignition Switch Feed, Wireless Module
M28 10 Amp Red Powertrain Control Module
M29 10 Amp Red Powertrain
M30 15 Amp Blue Wiper Motor Frt, J1962 Diagnostic Feed
M31 20 Amp Yellow Backup Lamps
M32 10 Amp Red Airbag Controller, TT EUROPE
M33 10 Amp Red Powertrain Controller
M34 10 Amp Red Park Assist, Climate Control System, Headlamp
Wash, Compass
M35 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors
M36 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet
M37 10 Amp Red Anti-Lock Brake System, Electronic Stability
Control, Stop Lamp Switch, Fuel Pump Relay
M38 25 Amp Natural Lock/Unlock Motors
612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the Integrated Power Mod-
ule, and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
•When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days, you may want to take steps to protect your
battery. You may:
•Remove Cartridge fuse #J13 in the Power Distribution
Center (PDC) labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) and
store it in a safe location within the PDC.
•Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
•Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Automatic Transmission Indicator
Lamp
658
Heater Control Lamps (2) 194
Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp
(Rear Window Defogger, and Rear
Wash/Wipe)
**
Soundbar Dome Lamp 912
** Bulbs only available from authorized dealer.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Headlamps (2) H13
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) 3157
Front Side Marker Lamps (2) 168
Fog Lamps PSX24W
Rear Stop/Tail/Turn Lamps (2) 3157
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp L.E.D.
Backup Lamps (2) 3157
License Lamp 194
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be
purchased from your local authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized
dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Headlamp
1. Open hood and support using prop rod.
2. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers along the
top 1/4 turn counterclockwise and remove.
3. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side
and working toward the other.
4. Turn both park and turn signal socket assemblies 1/4
turn counterclockwise and remove.
5. Remove the four screws holding the metal retaining
ring.
6. Remove the lamp from the collar.
7. Grasp the bulb and turn 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
8. Pull the bulb from the housing.
9. Push connector locking tab to the unlock position.
10. Remove connector from bulb.
11. Push connector onto new bulb base, and push the
connector locking tab to the lock position.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
12. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb 1/4 turn
clockwise.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615
Front Park/Turn Signal
1. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers along the
top 1/4 turn counterclockwise and remove.
2. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side
and working toward the other.
3. Turn the socket assembly 1/4 turn counterclockwise
and remove from housing. Pull the bulb straight from
the socket to replace.
Front Side Marker
1. Reach under the front fender flare and locate the front
side marker socket.
2. Turn the socket assembly counterclockwise 1/3 turn
and remove it from the housing. Pull the bulb straight
from the socket to replace.
Front Fog Lamp
1. Reach under the vehicle to access the back of the front
fog lamp.
2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the front
fog lamp connector receptacle.
3. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latch features and
squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the
back of the front fog lamp housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in
the housing and then connect the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamp
1. Remove the two inboard screws attaching the tail light
housing to the body. DO NOT REMOVE THE
OUTER SCREWS AT ANY TIME.
2. Separate the housing from the body by pushing the
lamp inboard while pulling the lamp away from the
body.
3. Rotate the appropriate socket 1/4 turn counterclock-
wise, then remove it from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that extends
upward from the tailgate behind the spare tire. If service
is needed, obtain the LED/Cover Assembly from your
local authorized dealer.
1. Remove the spare tire.
2. Remove the four screws holding the lens/cover in
place on the spare tire carrier.
3. Disconnect the wire harness from the back of the LED
cover.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) — Two Door Models 18.6 Gallons 70 Liters
Fuel (Approximate) — Four Door Models 22.5 Gallons 85 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
10.5 Quarts 9.9 Liters
* Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine
oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Fuel Selection 87 Octane
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – If
Equipped
We recommend you only use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission
Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4 fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR® Manual Transmission Lubricant.
Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front) We recommend you use MOPAR® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 80W-90)
(API GL-5).
Axle Differential (Rear) 226 RBI (Model 44) – We recommend you use MOPAR® Gear & Axle
Lubricant (SAE 80W-90) (API GL-5) or equivalent. For trailer towing, use
MOPAR® Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W-140). Models
equipped with Trac-Lok™ require an additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703.
If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid +4,
MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE .............622 ▫Maintenance Chart.....................624
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re-
quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi-
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500
miles (805 km).
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “In-
strument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odom-
eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
622 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
•Check engine oil level
•Check windshield washer fluid level
•Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
•Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and transmission as
needed
•Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
•Change oil and filter
•Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu-
lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
•Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
•Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick
•Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
•
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
•Inspect exhaust system
•Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
•Inspect all door latches for presence of grease,
reapply if necessary.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 623
Maintenance Chart
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and replace if necessary. XXX X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle
fluid. XX X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking
brake function. XXX X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
624 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace spark plugs ** X
Replace the ignition cables. X
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
XX
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 625
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter if using your ve-
hicle for any of the following:
trailer towing, snow plowing,
heavy loading, taxi, police, deliv-
ery service (commercial service),
off-road, desert operation or
more than 50% of your driving is
at sustained high speeds during
hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
X
Change the automatic
transmission fluid and filter(s). X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
626 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change the manual transmission
fluid if using your vehicle for any
of the following: trailer towing,
snow plowing, heavy loading,
taxi, police, delivery service
(commercial service), off-road,
desert operation or more than
50% of your driving is at sus-
tained high speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C).
XX X X X
Change transfer case fluid if
using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or
frequent trailer towing.
XX
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 627
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary. X
Change front and rear axle fluid
if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent
trailer towing.
XX X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
628 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
WARNING!
•You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
•Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 629
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE ...................633
▫Prepare For The Appointment.............633
▫Prepare A List ........................633
▫Be Reasonable With Requests .............633
䡵IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............633
▫Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center.......634
▫Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ......635
▫In Mexico contact: .....................635
▫Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .............635
▫Service Contract ......................636
䡵WARRANTY INFORMATION .............637
䡵MOPAR®PARTS.......................637
䡵REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............637
▫In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.......................637
▫In Canada...........................638
9
䡵PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............638
䡵DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES .........639
▫Treadwear...........................640
▫Traction Grades .......................640
▫Temperature Grades....................641
632 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealer, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 633
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
•If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•Owner’s name and address
•Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•Authorized dealer name
•Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426–5337
634 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 635
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
(Continued)
636 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR® PARTS
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 637
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve-
hicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
638 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
Included are starting, operating, emergency and mainte-
nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
•1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 639
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
640 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 641
INDEX
10
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ................307
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............588
Adding Fuel .............................517
Additives, Fuel ...........................515
Airbag..................................62
Airbag Deployment ........................71
Airbag Light .............................73
Airbag Maintenance ........................72
Airbag, Side ..............................70
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .577
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................579
Air Conditioning..........................395
Air Conditioning Controls ...................395
Air Conditioning Filter .....................407
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ..............408
Air Conditioning Refrigerant .................579
Air Conditioning System ....................395
Air Pressure, Tires.........................489
Alarm Light .............................309
Alarm (Security Alarm) ......................21
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............9
Antenna, Satellite Radio.....................357
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..................588
Disposal ..............................590
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................459
Anti-Lock Warning Light ....................307
Appearance Care .........................600
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) ...........22
Assistance Towing.........................130
Auto Down Power Windows ..................44
Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................113
Automatic Door Locks ......................41
Automatic Headlights ......................170
Automatic Oil Change Indicator ...............329
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..........399
Automatic Transaxle
Interlock System .........................17
644 INDEX
Automatic Transmission ....................424
Adding Fluid ..........................597
Fluid and Filter Changes ..................597
Fluid Change ..........................597
Fluid Level Check .......................595
Fluid Type ............................594
Special Additives .......................595
Autostick ...............................431
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ........184
Auxiliary Power Outlet .....................184
Axle Lock...............................438
Battery.................................577
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ........28
Belts, Seat ...............................50
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................582
Brake Assist System .......................462
Brake Control System, Electronic ..............460
Brake System ............................592
Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................459
Master Cylinder ........................593
Parking ..............................456
Warning Light .........................306
Brake/Transmission Interlock .................424
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle .........99
Bulb Replacement .........................614
Bulbs, Light .............................103
Calibration, Compass ......................322
Capacities, Fluid ..........................618
Caps, Filler
Fuel .................................517
Power Steering .........................456
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................589
Carbon Monoxide Warning ..................100
Cargo Light .............................174
Car Washes .............................601
10
INDEX 645
Cellular Phone ...........................115
Center High Mounted Stop Light ..............617
Certification Label.........................519
Chains, Tire .............................499
Changing A Flat Tire .......................547
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................477
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .315
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..............100
Checks, Safety ...........................100
Child Restraint ............................75
Child Safety Locks .........................42
Clean Air Gasoline ........................513
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................602
Climate Control ..........................395
Clock..................................341
Cold Weather Operation ....................416
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ..............394
Compact Spare Tire........................493
Compass ...............................319
Compass Calibration .......................322
Compass Variance .........................321
Computer, Trip/Travel......................319
Connector
UCI.................................386
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ..........386
Console ................................191
Console, Floor ...........................191
Contract, Service ..........................636
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...........589
Cooling System...........................586
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............588
Coolant Capacity .......................618
Coolant Level ..........................591
Disposal of Used Coolant .................590
Drain, Flush, and Refill ...................587
Inspection ............................587
Points to Remember .....................591
646 INDEX
Pressure Cap ..........................589
Radiator Cap ..........................589
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .............588
Corrosion Protection .......................600
Cruise Light .............................310
Cupholders .............................190
Customer Assistance .......................633
Data Recorder, Event .......................74
Daytime Running Lights ....................173
Dealer Service............................573
Defroster, Rear Window.....................298
Defroster, Windshield ......................102
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ..................177
Diagnostic System, Onboard .................570
Dimmer Switch, Headlight...................172
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ...........................574
Power Steering .........................456
Disabled Vehicle Towing ....................563
Disarming, Theft System .....................22
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................590
Door Locks ..............................38
Door Locks, Automatic ......................41
Doors ..................................32
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ......................156
Driving ................................441
Dual Top ...............................193
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet)........184
Electrical Power Outlets.....................184
Electric Remote Mirrors .....................114
Electronic Brake Control System ...............460
Brake Assist System .....................462
Electronic Roll Mitigation .................466
Traction Control System ...................461
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..............466
10
INDEX 647
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........180
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............467
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........318
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)......319
Emergency Brake .........................456
Emergency, In Case of
Jacking ...............................547
Jump Starting ..........................555
Tow Hooks ............................561
Emission Control System Maintenance ..........571
Engine
Air Cleaner ...........................577
Block Heater ..........................418
Break-In Recommendations .................99
Compartment ..........................569
Compartment Identification ................569
Cooling ..............................586
Exhaust Gas Caution .....................100
Fails to Start ...........................416
Flooded, Starting .......................416
Fuel Requirements ......................513
Jump Starting ..........................555
Oil..................................574
Oil Change Interval ......................329
Oil Selection ...........................575
Oil Synthetic ..........................576
Overheating ...........................546
Starting ..............................414
Temperature Gauge ......................309
Engine Oil Viscosity .......................576
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ...................576
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............70
Entry System, Illuminated ....................23
Ethanol ................................514
Event Data Recorder ........................74
Exhaust Gas Caution .......................100
Exhaust System...........................100
648 INDEX
Extender, Seat Belt .........................61
Exterior Lights ...........................103
Fabric Care..............................603
Fabric Top ..............................604
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................577
Air Conditioning .......................407
Engine Oil ............................576
Engine Oil Disposal .....................576
Flashers
Hazard Warning ........................546
Turn Signal ...........................103
Flash-To-Pass ............................172
Flooded Engine Starting ....................416
Fluid Capacities ..........................618
Fluid Leaks .............................104
Fluid Level Checks ........................599
Engine Oil ............................574
Manual Transmission ....................598
Power Steering .........................456
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ...........619
Fog Lights ..............................172
Fog Light Service .........................616
Fold and Tumble Rear Seat ..................163
Folding Rear Seat .........................165
Folding Windshield ........................290
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...................546
Four Wheel Drive .........................433
Four Wheel Drive Operation .................433
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................559
Front Axle (Differential).....................599
Fuel...................................513
Adding ..............................517
Additives .............................515
Clean Air .............................513
Ethanol ..............................514
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................517
10
INDEX 649
Gasoline ..............................513
Gauge ...............................304
Materials Added ........................515
Methanol .............................514
Octane Rating ..........................513
Requirements ..........................513
Tank Capacity ..........................618
Fueling ................................517
Fuses ..................................607
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...................517
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................513
Gasoline (Fuel) ...........................513
Gasoline, Reformulated .....................513
Gauges
Coolant Temperature .....................309
Fuel .................................304
Odometer .............................312
Speedometer ..........................304
Tachometer ............................308
Gear Ranges .............................419
Gear Select Lever Override ..................562
General Information ........................21
Glass Cleaning ...........................603
Gross Axle Weight Rating ...................523
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating..................522
GVWR .................................520
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect®) ...............115
HardTop...............................206
Hard Top, Modular ........................206
Hard Top Removal ........................214
Hazard Warning Flasher ....................546
Headlights
Automatic ............................170
Bulb Replacement .......................615
High Beam ............................172
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .........172
650 INDEX
Passing ..............................172
Replacing .............................615
Switch ...............................169
Head Restraints ..........................162
Heated Mirrors ...........................114
Heated Seats.............................160
Heater .................................395
Heater, Engine Block .......................418
High Beam Indicator .......................305
Hill Descent Control .......................474
Hill Descent Control Indicator ................474
Hill Start Assist...........................463
Hitches
Trailer Towing .........................525
Hood Release ............................167
Ignition .................................15
Key..................................15
Ignition Key Removal .......................15
Illuminated Entry ..........................23
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................18
Infant Restraint ...........................75
Inflation Pressure Tires .....................489
Information Center, Vehicle ..................325
Inside Rearview Mirror .....................111
Instrument Cluster ........................303
Instrument Panel and Controls ................302
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............604
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ..............607
Interior Appearance Care....................603
Interior Lights ...........................173
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).............177
Introduction ..............................4
Inverter, Power ...........................188
Jacking Instructions........................550
Jack Location ............................548
10
INDEX 651
Jack Operation ...........................547
Jump Starting ............................555
Key-In Reminder ..........................16
Keyless Entry System .......................24
Key, Programming .........................20
Key, Replacement ..........................19
Keys ...................................15
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................18
Lane Change and Turn Signals ................305
Lane Change Assist........................171
Lap Belts ................................50
Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................50
Latches ................................104
Lead Free Gasoline ........................513
Leaks, Fluid .............................104
Life of Tires .............................496
Light Bulbs..............................103
Lights .................................103
Airbag ................................73
Alarm ...............................309
Anti-Lock .............................307
Anti-Lock Warning ......................307
Automatic Headlights ....................170
Back-Up ..............................617
Brake Assist Warning ....................472
Brake Warning .........................306
Bulb Replacement .......................615
Cargo ...............................174
Center Mounted Stop ....................617
Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) .........315
Cruise ...............................310
Daytime Running .......................173
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator .....472
Electronic Throttle Control Warning ..........318
Exterior ..............................103
Fog .................................172
652 INDEX
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................546
Headlights ............................169
Headlight Switch .......................169
High Beam ............................305
High Beam Indicator .....................305
Hill Descent Control Indicator ..............474
Illuminated Entry ........................23
Instrument Cluster ......................169
Interior ..............................173
Lights On Reminder .....................171
Low Fuel .............................304
Oil Pressure ...........................305
Passing ..............................172
Rear Servicing .........................617
Rear Tail .............................617
Seat Belt Reminder ......................305
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ...............309
Service ...............................615
Side Marker ...........................617
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ...............309
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ............310
Traction Control ........................472
Turn Signal ...........................103
Voltage ..............................304
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ......304
Loading Vehicle ..........................519
Tires ................................482
Locking Axle ............................438
Locks ..................................38
Automatic Door .........................41
Child Protection .........................42
Door .................................38
Power Door ............................40
Steering Wheel ..........................17
Lubrication, Body .........................582
Maintenance Free Battery....................577
Maintenance Procedures ....................573
10
INDEX 653
Maintenance Schedule ......................622
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).......315
Manual, Service ..........................638
Manual Transmission ......................418
Fluid Level Check .......................598
Lubricant Selection ......................597
Shift Speeds ...........................419
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ....................593
Methanol ...............................514
Mini-Trip Computer .......................319
Mirrors.................................111
Automatic Dimming .....................113
Electric Powered ........................114
Electric Remote .........................114
Heated ...............................114
Outside ..............................112
Rearview .............................111
Vanity ...............................115
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............9
Modular Hard Top ........................206
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................501
Mopar Parts .............................572
MTBE/ETBE ............................514
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................99
Occupant Restraints ........................47
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ................513
Odometer...............................312
Trip.................................310
Oil Change Indicator .......................315
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ..................315
Oil, Engine ..............................574
Capacity .............................618
Change Interval ........................329
Dipstick ..............................574
Disposal ..............................576
Filter ................................576
654 INDEX
Filter Disposal .........................576
Identification Logo ......................575
Materials Added to ......................576
Pressure Warning Light ...................305
Recommendation .......................575
Synthetic .............................576
Viscosity .............................576
Oil Filter, Selection ........................577
Oil Pressure Light .........................305
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................570
Operating Precautions ......................570
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............6
Outside Rearview Mirrors ...................112
Overdrive...............................432
Overdrive OFF Switch......................432
Overheating, Engine .......................309
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) .............6
Paint Care ..............................600
Panic Alarm ..............................26
Parking Brake............................456
Passing Light ............................172
Personal Settings..........................335
Pets....................................98
Pets, Transporting..........................98
Phone, Cellular ...........................115
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect®) ...............115
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ..........483
Power
Door Locks ............................40
Inverter ..............................188
Mirrors ..............................114
Steering ..............................455
Windows ..............................43
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ................61
10
INDEX 655
Preparation for Jacking .....................549
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................60
Programmable Electronic Features .............335
Radial Ply Tires ..........................491
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ...........589
Radio Operation ..........................395
Rear Axle (Differential) .....................599
Rear Swing Gate...........................45
Rear Window Defroster .....................298
Rear Window Features .....................297
Rear Wiper/Washer........................297
Recorder, Event Data .......................74
Recreational Towing .......................540
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ........542
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) ......544
Reformulated Gasoline .....................513
Refrigerant ..............................580
Release, Hood............................167
Reminder, Seat Belt.........................60
Remote Control
Door Locks ............................24
Starting System .........................29
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ..................24
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........392
Remote Starting System......................29
Replacement Bulbs ........................614
Replacement Keys .........................19
Replacement Parts.........................572
Replacement Tires .........................497
Reporting Safety Defects ....................637
Resetting Oil Change Indicator................329
Restraint, Head...........................162
Restraints, Child...........................75
Restraints, Occupant ........................47
Rotation, Tires ...........................500
656 INDEX
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................101
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................103
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................637
Safety, Exhaust Gas ........................100
Safety Information, Tire .....................476
Safety Tips ..............................100
Satellite Radio Antenna .....................357
Schedule, Maintenance .....................622
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................604
Seat Belt Reminder .........................60
Seat Belts ................................50
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........56
And Pregnant Women .....................61
Child Restraint ..........................75
Extender ..............................61
Front Seat .............................50
Inspection ............................101
Pretensioners ...........................60
Reminder .............................305
Untwisting Procedure .....................56
Seats ..................................153
Adjustment ...........................154
Easy Entry ............................156
Fold and Tumble Rear ....................163
Heated ...............................160
Height Adjustment ......................155
Rear Folding ..........................165
Removal .............................164
Seatback Release ........................156
Tilting ...............................156
Security Against Theft.......................21
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm)..................21
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................18
Sentry Key Programming ....................20
Sentry Key Replacement .....................19
Service Assistance .........................633
10
INDEX 657
Service Contract ..........................636
Service Manuals ..........................638
Settings, Personal .........................335
Setting the Clock..........................341
Shifting ................................422
Automatic Transmission ..................422
Manual Transmission ....................418
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ...........................542
Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ...........................544
Shift Lever Override .......................562
Shoulder Belts ............................50
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage ................56
Side Airbag ..............................70
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) ............407
Signals, Turn ............................103
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)...................499
Snow Tires ..............................492
Soft Top ................................225
Spare Tire...............................493
Speed Control (Cruise Control)................180
Speedometer.............................304
Starting .................................29
Automatic Transmission ..................415
Cold Weather ..........................416
Engine Block Heater .....................418
Engine Fails to Start .....................416
Manual Transmission ....................414
Remote ...............................29
Steering
Power ...............................455
Tilt Column ...........................179
Wheel Lock ............................17
Wheel, Tilt ............................179
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............392
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .392
Storage ................................613
658 INDEX
Storage, Behind the Seat ....................192
Storage, Vehicle...........................406
Storing Your Vehicle .......................613
Stuck, Freeing............................559
Sunrider................................284
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ..........62
Sway Bar Disconnect, Electronic ...............439
Swing Gate, Rear ..........................45
Synthetic Engine Oil .......................576
System, Remote Starting .....................29
Tachometer..............................308
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ..........399
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ............309
Theft System Arming .......................22
Theft System Disarming .....................22
Tilt Steering Column .......................179
Tip Start................................415
Tire and Loading Information Placard...........482
Tire Markings ............................476
Tires ..................................103
Aging (Life of Tires) .....................496
Air Pressure ...........................487
Chains ...............................499
Changing .............................547
Compact Spare .........................493
General Information .....................487
High Speed ...........................490
Inflation Pressures .......................489
Jacking ...............................547
Life of Tires ...........................496
Load Capacity .........................482
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............501
Pressure Warning Light ...................310
Quality Grading ........................639
Radial ...............................491
Replacement ...........................497
Rotation ..............................500
10
INDEX 659
Safety ...............................476
Sizes ................................477
Snow Tires ............................492
Spare Tire .............................549
Spinning .............................495
Tread Wear Indicators ....................496
Tire Safety Information .....................476
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ................532
To Open Hood ...........................167
Tow Hooks, Emergency .....................561
Towing ................................522
24-Hour Towing Assistance ................130
Disabled Vehicle ........................563
Guide ...............................526
Recreational ...........................540
Weight ...............................526
Towing Assistance.........................130
Trac-Lok Rear Axle ........................437
Traction Control ..........................461
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ..................473
Trailer Towing ...........................522
Cooling System Tips .....................539
Hitches ..............................525
Minimum Requirements ..................533
Trailer and Tongue Weight .................532
Wiring ...............................537
Trailer Towing Guide.......................526
Trailer Weight............................526
Transfer Case ............................598
Four-Wheel-Drive Operation ...............433
Maintenance ...........................598
Transmission ............................594
Automatic ............................424
Manual ..............................418
Range Indicator ........................310
Shifting ..............................422
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .28
Tread Wear Indicators ......................496
660 INDEX
Trip Computer ...........................319
Trip Odometer ...........................312
Trip Odometer Reset Button..................310
Turn Signals .............................171
UCI Connector ...........................386
Uconnect® (Hands-Free Phone) ...............115
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................639
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .386
Unleaded Gasoline ........................513
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................56
Upholstery Care ..........................603
Vanity Mirrors ...........................115
Variance, Compass ........................321
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............8
Vehicle Loading ..........................483
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............9
Vehicle Storage ...........................406
Viscosity, Engine Oil .......................576
Voice Recognition System (VR)................147
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .304
Warnings and Cautions.......................8
Warranty Information ......................637
Washers, Windshield .......................583
Washing Vehicle ..........................601
Wheel and Wheel Trim .....................602
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care .................602
Wind Buffeting............................45
Window Fogging .........................406
Windows ................................43
Power ................................43
Windshield Defroster.......................102
Windshield, Folding .......................290
Windshield Washers .......................176
Fluid ................................583
Windshield Wiper Blades....................583
10
INDEX 661
Windshield Wipers ........................176
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................583
Wiper, Rear .............................297
662 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to
the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The
negative power connection should be made to body sheet
metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This
connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only
fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure
a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference
between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s
electronic systems.
Wrangler
Includes Wrangler Unlimited
Chrysler Group LLC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2013 Wrangler
13JK72-126-AF Sixth Edition Printed in U.S.A.
2013

Navigation menu